JP2022181395A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing amusement in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a game control microcomputer 81 for executing a special game when a determination result by a jackpot determination process is a specific result on the basis of entry of a game ball into a first start port 20 or a second start port 21, and a performance control microcomputer 91 capable of controlling a predetermined performance. When a non-specified number of times resulting in a non-specified result which is different from the specific result by the jackpot determination process reaches the prescribed number of times, the game control microcomputer 81 can control a game state to a time-saving state. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays a mode entry suggesting image ZK suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the time-saving state, until the non-specific number of times reaches the prescribed number of times.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 71

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine in which a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a game ball enters a start hole (ball entrance). When a big hit is determined, a variable display of a special symbol is performed to notify the result of the big hit determination (see Patent Document 1).

Then, in the gaming machine according to Patent Document 1, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot in the variable display of the special symbols, the game machine may be controlled to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

JP 2018-161309 A

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a game control means for executing a special game when a determination result by a hit determination process is a specific result based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance;
Equipped with a production control means capable of controlling a predetermined production,
The game control means is
Controlling to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player is possible according to the non-specific number of non-specific results different from the specific result in the hit determination process reaching a specified number of times,
The production control means is
Until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times, a game state suggestive display is executed that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous game state.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a schematic front view showing a second big winning device and the like provided in the gaming machine. 1. It is an enlarged view of the A portion shown in FIG. 1, and is a figure which shows the display devices with which the game machine is provided. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) It is a jackpot determination table. (B) It is a jackpot symbol type determination table. (C) It is a small winning symbol type determination table. (D) A lost symbol type determination table. (E) A reach determination table. It is a determination table of the jackpot symbol type and the small hit pattern type, and is a table for explaining the types of the jackpot and the small hit. (A) It is a determination table of the lost pattern type for the non-time saving state. (B) It is a losing pattern type determination table for the time saving state. It is a working hours setting table for reaching the number of working hours given. (A) It is a normal symbol hit determination table. (B) It is a normal symbol variation pattern determination table. (C) An electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for non-time saving state. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving state. It is a specific table of start winning commands. (A) It is a variation performance pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state. (B) It is a fluctuation performance pattern determination table for a time saving state in which the number of times of remaining time saving is 2 or more. (C) It is a fluctuation effect pattern determination table for the time saving state in which the number of times of remaining time saving is 1. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a normal icon (normal corresponding icon, normal pending icon), (B) is a diagram showing an example of a first special icon (first special corresponding icon, first special pending icon) There is, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a second special icon (second special corresponding icon, second special reserved icon). (A) is a diagram showing a first effect character, (B) is a diagram showing a second effect character, and (C) is a diagram showing a third effect character. (A) is a diagram showing a first dialogue image, (B) is a diagram showing a second dialogue image, and (C) is a diagram showing a third dialogue image. 4 is a table showing types of scenario patterns for icon display. It is a scenario pattern selection table. It is a change opportunity production selection table. This is a production character-associated suggestion production selection table. It is a production character accompanying production selection table. This is a production character change suggestion production selection table. This is a production character change production selection table. This is a speech announcement effect pattern selection table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of gate passage processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is a flow chart of variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small winning game). It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small winning game). 9 is a flowchart of distribution member control processing; 8 is a flowchart of specific area sensor detection processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is a flow chart of production mode switching processing. It is a flow chart of a variation effect pattern selection process. 10 is a flowchart of mode suggestion effect start selection processing. It is a flow chart of end processing of fluctuation production. It is a flow chart of production mode designation processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart showing a case where it is controlled to the time saving state in the last special figure lottery in the time saving state of the first embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the case where it is controlled to a time saving state when reaching|attaining the time saving provision frequency|count, and a time chart which shows the case where it transfers to the time saving production mode. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the battle reach in the variable production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the time reduction rush production|presentation in the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the result production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending|holding production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the change opportunity production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the change opportunity production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the suspension change production|presentation of the 1st special suspension icon of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the said change production|presentation of the 1st special said icon of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example when a second special icon is displayed according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example when a second special icon is displayed according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example when a second special icon is displayed according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example when a second special icon is displayed according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example when a second special icon is displayed according to the first embodiment; FIG. The time chart of the variation performance from the remaining two times to the number of times of time saving in the non-time saving state of the first embodiment, the time chart of the mode entry suggestion image, the mode entry suggestion count-up image time chart, and the mode It is a time chart of the rush confirmation image. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable production|presentation of 1st Embodiment.

1. Structure of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a first embodiment) of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1 , the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes a game machine frame 49 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 49 . A front frame 51 of the game machine frame 49 has a handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle, a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 for storing game balls, and a hit ball supply tray 61. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is provided for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated therein. In addition, the front frame 51 is provided with an effect button 63 and a select button 64 (see the plan view within the dashed line in FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. there is A frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67 for decoration are provided on the front frame 51 .

The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 and formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball shot by operating a handle 60 flows down. The game board 2 is provided with board lamps 5 (see FIG. 5) for decoration. The game area 3 is provided with a plurality of game pegs (not shown) for guiding game balls.

Also, near the center of the game area 3, an image display device 50, which is a liquid crystal display device, is provided. On the display screen 50a (display unit) of the image display device 50, variable display of production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with the variable display (variable display) of the first special pattern and the second special pattern to be described later. There is a production pattern display area for performing. The performance symbol display area is composed of, for example, three display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the left display area, a medium effect pattern 8C is displayed in the middle display area, and a right effect pattern 8R is displayed in the right display area. Each of the performance symbols is composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 50 displays the first special symbol and the To clearly display the result of variable display of a second special pattern (that is, the result of a jackpot lottery).

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". Also, when winning a small prize, the production pattern is stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as "246". In addition, when it is a loss (usually a loss), the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a separate number such as "263". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally grasps the result of the jackpot lottery by the image display device 50 rather than by the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b. In addition, the positions of the display areas of the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may not be fixed. Further, as a form of variable display of the effect symbols, for example, there is a form of scrolling in the vertical direction. In addition, it is possible to arbitrarily change the combination of performance symbols to be stop-displayed according to each lottery result, and the performance symbols may be stop-displayed with random eyes when winning a small prize.

The image display device 50, in addition to the production pattern fluctuation production using the production pattern as described above (also referred to as "decorative pattern fluctuation production" or simply "variation production"), parallel to the jackpot game (special game state, special game) The display screen 50a displays a big win performance performed as a player, a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, and the like. In addition, in the effect symbol variation effect, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are displayed in addition to effect symbols such as numbers.

A center decoration 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 50 . A stage portion 11 capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface to a first starting port 20 described later is formed at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A warp section 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 to allow game balls to flow in from the entrance and flow out to the stage section 11 from the exit. Further, on the upper part of the center decoration body 10, a decoration member 13 representing characters, figures, etc. is arranged.

Below the image display device 50 in the game area 3, there is fixed a first start opening 20 (an example of a "ball entrance" or a "first ball entrance") that makes it easy for a game ball to enter. A winning device 19 is provided. The first start hole 20 is also called a first start prize hole, a fixed ball hole, or a first ball hole. The winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (predetermined condition) triggers the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery, ie, acquisition and determination of a big hit random number, etc.).

In addition, on the upper right side of the first starting port 20, a normal variable prize winning device (so-called electric chew) 22 having a second starting port 21 (an example of "entrance" or "second ball entrance") is provided. there is The second starting opening 21 is also referred to as a second starting winning opening, a variable entrance, or a second entrance. The winning of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (predetermined condition) triggers the lottery of the second special symbol (big hit lottery, that is, acquisition and determination of a big hit random number or the like).

The electric tube 22 has a movable member (entrance opening/closing member) 23 that can move back and forth, and opens and closes the second start opening 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (see FIG. 4). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 only when the movable member 23 is open (that is, when the movable member 23 is in an open state). That is, when the movable member 23 is closed (that is, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state), the game ball cannot enter. In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is closed than when it is open, it is completely impossible to enter when the movable member 23 is closed. It does not have to be possible.

In addition, below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device (first special variable winning device, other special winning means) provided with a first big winning port (other special winning port) 30 ) 31 is provided. The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member (another special prize opening opening/closing member) 32 that takes an open state and a closed state, and opens and closes the first big prize prize opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32 . The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 4). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is open (that is, when it is in an open state).

In addition, on the right side of the first big winning hole 30 in the game area 3, a second big winning device (second special variable winning device, special winning means) provided with a second big winning hole (equivalent to a special winning hole) 35 ) 36 are provided. The second big winning device 36 has an opening/closing member (equivalent to a special winning opening opening/closing member) 37 that takes an open state and a closed state. The opening/closing member 37 is of a forward/retreat type that moves back and forth, and is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 4). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is open (that is, when it is in an open state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, inside the second big winning device 36, there are a specific area (V area) 39 and a non-specific area 70 through which a game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole 35 can pass. is formed. In the second big winning device 36, upstream of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 70, a second big winning hole sensor 35a for detecting the winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 35 is arranged. . In addition, a specific area sensor 39a for detecting passage of a game ball to the specific area 39 is arranged in the specific area 39. As shown in FIG. Further, in the non-specific area 70, a non-specific area sensor 70a for detecting passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 70 is arranged. In addition, the second big winning device 36 includes a distribution member 71 that distributes game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening 35 to either the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 70, and a distribution that drives the distribution member 71. A member solenoid 73 is provided. When the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, the distribution member 71 takes a first state (passage permission state) in which the game balls are distributed to the specific area 39, and when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game balls are distributed. A second state (passage blocking state) of distributing to the non-specific area 70 is adopted.

The distribution member 71 is in a passage permitting state in which passage of game balls to the specific region 39 is permitted when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, as indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. When the distribution member 71 is in the pass-allowing state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 passes through the specific area 39 after passing the second big winning hole sensor 35a. The route of this game ball is called a first route.

2, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized, the distribution member 71 is in a passage blocking state that prevents the game ball from passing through the specific area 39. As shown in FIG. When the distribution member 71 is in the passage blocking state, the game ball that has won the second large winning opening 35 rolls on the distribution member 71 after passing through the second large winning opening sensor 35a and rolls on the non-specific area. Pass 70. This game ball route is called a second route.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 serves as a trigger for execution of a jackpot game, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery is also performed depending on whether the game ball passes through the specific area 39 or not. A jackpot won by the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol is called a type 1 jackpot, and a jackpot won by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 is called a type 2 jackpot. Also, a jackpot game executed by winning a jackpot of the first kind is called a jackpot game of the first kind, and a jackpot game played by winning a jackpot of the second kind is called a jackpot game of the second kind. Also, the type 1 jackpot is also called a direct hit jackpot. In addition, a big hit and a small hit correspond to a "specific result."

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, above the second starting port 21 in the game area 3, a gate 28 through which game balls can pass is provided. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for execution of a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (hit random number)) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22 .

Furthermore, a normal winning opening 27 is provided at the lower left portion of the game area 3 . Also, at the bottom of the game area 3, an out port 6 is provided for discharging out of the game area 3 game balls that have been hit into the game area 3 but have not won in any of the winning openings.

In this way, the game area 3 in which various winning holes are arranged includes a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. There is. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting. On the other hand, a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the flow path through which the game balls flow down when the game is played with the left hand is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game balls flow down when the game is played with the right hand. , the second flow path R2.

A first starting port 20, a first big winning device 31, and an out port 6 are provided on the first flow path R1. A player aims to win a prize to the first starting port 20 by hitting a game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1.

On the other hand, a gate 28, an electric tube 22, a second big winning device 36, a first big winning device 31, and an outlet 6 are provided on the second flow path R2. By hitting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, the player passes through the gate 28, the second starting port 21 related to the electric chew 22, the first big winning port 30, or the second big winning port Aiming for 35 points.

In this embodiment, the gate 28, the electric chew 22, and the second big winning device 36 are unitized, and can be attached to and detached from the game board 2 as one structural body. In addition, the fixed winning device 19 and the first big winning device 31 are unitized and can be attached to and detached from the game board 2 as one structure.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a display device 40 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a that variably displays a first special symbol (an example of an identification symbol, also referred to as a special symbol 1), and a second special symbol (an example of an identification symbol, also referred to as a special symbol 2). ) is variably displayed, and a normal symbol display 42 that variably displays a normal symbol (general symbol) is included. In addition, the display device 40 includes the first special symbol display device 43a that displays the number of memory of the operation suspension (first special symbol suspension) of the first special symbol display device 41a, and the second special symbol display device 41b. It includes a second special figure suspension indicator 43b that displays the number of memory of operation suspension (second special figure suspension). The first special figure reservation is also called special figure 1 reservation, and the second special figure reservation is also called special figure 2 reservation.

The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 . The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol (special symbol). Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display device 41. Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display 43.

In the special symbol display device 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped, so that a lottery (special symbol lottery, The result of the jackpot lottery) is notified. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode (specific stop mode), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot pattern (that is, the type of the jackpot won) is used. Then, a big win game is performed to open the first big winning hole 30.例文帳に追加In addition, when the stop pattern is a special pattern (small hit pattern) of a predetermined small hit stop mode, the opening pattern according to the type of the small hit pattern stopped and displayed (that is, the type of the small win won). Then, a small winning game is performed to open the second big winning hole 35.例文帳に追加In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the big winning game and the small winning game will be described later.

Specifically, the special symbol display device 41 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery by the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lights up, ●: lights out) 1, 2, from the left A jackpot pattern in which the fifth and sixth LEDs are lit is displayed. Also, if you win a small win (one of the multiple types of small wins described later), the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left will light up like "●●●●○○●●". Display the small winning pattern. Also, in the case of a failure (one of the multiple types of failures described later), display a failure pattern in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". . In addition, you may employ|adopt the aspect which turns off all the LED as one of the missing designs. In addition, before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. This is a mode in which the LED lights up. Note that the mode of the variable display can be appropriately changed, for example, all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

In this pachinko game machine 1, when there is a winning of a game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, the values of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the winning (ball acquisition information, judgment information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 (see FIG. 4). Specifically, if the winning to the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a (see FIG. 4) as the first special figure reservation, if the winning to the second start port 21 It is stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 85b (see FIG. 4) as 2 special figure suspension. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value (upper limit number, upper limit storage number, upper limit reservation number) in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, the second The special figure reservation storage unit 85b is both "4".

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game (jackpot game or small prize game), the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. .

And the number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b are each composed of four LEDs. The special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Auxiliary game is played to make it possible. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of, for example, two LEDs (see FIG. 3), and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery by its lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern is displayed, such as "●○", in which only the right LED lights up. A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are variably displayed (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. Note that the mode of the variable display can be appropriately changed, for example, all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

In this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the gate When there is passage to 28, it is configured not to acquire normal symbol random numbers based on the passage. That is, it is the structure which does not memorize|store the operation|movement suspension (ordinary figure suspension) of the normal design indicator 42. FIG. In addition, it is good also as a structure which can be memorize|stored to the predetermined|prescribed upper limit number (for example, "4") in the predetermined|prescribed storage area in RAM84 (refer FIG. 4). In this case, the normal pattern reservation stored in the RAM 84 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal pattern random number corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern for showing the determination result is executed. Also, in this case, it is preferable to provide a general pattern hold display that displays the number of general pattern reservations stored.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control board (game control board) 80 for controlling game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transitions, A sub-control board (effect control board) 90 for performing control, a payout control board 110 for controlling pay-out of game balls, and the like are provided. The main control board 80 forms a main control section, and the sub-control board 90 forms a sub-control section 99 together with an image control board 100, a lamp control board 107, and an audio control board 106, which will be described later. The sub-control unit 99 includes at least the sub-control board 90, and can control various effects using the effect means (the image display device 50, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, the board movable body 15, etc.). If it is

The pachinko game machine 1 also has a power board 150 . The power board 150 supplies power to the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90, and the payout control board 110, and supplies necessary power to other devices through these boards. A backup power supply circuit 151 is provided on the power supply board 150 . The backup power supply circuit 151 supplies power to the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 to be described later when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is retained even when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off. A power switch 155 is connected to the power board 150 . ON/OFF operation of the power switch 155 switches on/off of the power supply. A backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 may be provided on the main control board 80 or a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 may be provided on the sub control board 90 .

The power supply board 150 is provided with a RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 for causing the CPU 82 to clear information stored in the RAM 84 of the game control microcomputer 81 (game control means) described later. It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 152 is provided on the power board 150 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Therefore, the RAM clear switch 152 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the game arcade who can open the game machine frame 49 . That is, the RAM clear switch 152 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. The RAM clear switch 152 is a tact switch, and when the RAM clear switch 152 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 152 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 81 . The state in which the RAM clear switch 152 is pressed is called the ON state of the RAM clear switch 152, and the state in which the RAM clear switch 152 is not pressed is called the OFF state of the RAM clear switch 152. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the ROM 83, and inputs and outputs data and signals. An I/O port section (input/output circuit) 87 is included for the purpose. Note that the ROM 83 may be externally attached. The RAM 84 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 85 (first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, second special figure reservation storage unit 85b).

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88, as shown in FIG. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, and the non-specific sensor. A region sensor 70a and a normal winning opening sensor 250a are connected.

The first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. As shown in FIG. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 within the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. As shown in FIG. The non-specific area sensor 70a is provided in the non-specific area 70 inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 250a is provided in each normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27.例文帳に追加

Also, as the solenoids, the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the sorting member solenoid 73 are connected. The electric tooth solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric tooth 22 . The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . The distribution member solenoid 73 drives the distribution member 71 of the second big winning device 36 .

Furthermore, the main control board 80 is connected with a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, and a first special symbol reservation display 43a. That is, display control of these display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 .

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a prize ball payout device 120 and a card unit 135 (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card). Also, a launcher 112 is connected via a launch control circuit 111 . Launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 to release the prize balls. or pay out rental balls. Prize balls to be paid out and rented balls are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the handle 60, and the shooting volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60. Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 . In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds.

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "effect control microcomputer") 91 that controls the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 (production control means) includes a ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling the production as the game progresses, a RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 92 that executes the program stored in the ROM 93. , an I/O port section (input/output circuit) 97 for inputting/outputting data and signals. Note that the ROM 93 may be externally attached.

The RAM 94 is provided with a starting prize winning command pending storage section for storing a starting prize winning command including pending lottery information. The reservation lottery information includes information based on each random number stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 of the main control board 80 . The start winning prize command reserve storage unit further includes a first start prize winning command reserve storage unit that stores a first start prize winning command based on the first special prize reserve, and a second start prize winning command that stores a second start prize command based on the second special prize reserve. 2 start winning command reserve storage unit is provided. In addition, the RAM 94 may be provided with a storage unit for storing a command including information on holding the normal map.

Specifically, the first start winning command reserve storage unit and the second start win prize command reserve storage unit are each provided with a storage area corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure reserve. In the pachinko game machine 1, four storage areas are provided in the first start prize winning command reserve storage part and four storage areas are provided in the second start prize command reserve storage part in accordance with the upper limit number of special figure reserves. be done. Furthermore, each storage area is provided with a plurality of small areas. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1, each time a starting winning command specified based on the winning of the starting opening, data indicating the display mode of the icon (holding icon, the icon), and a starting winning command are received, the count is incremented. and the received counter value are stored in each small area. The reception counter is used to manage winning order.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 causes the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform display control of the image display device 50 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The RAM 104 of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM 103 of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols (including production patterns), background images, and the like. image data is stored. The CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

Also, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 . Note that a CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates the light emission data. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the following. Data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission data.

Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 operates the board movable body 15 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . Although not shown in FIG. 1, the board movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (also called drive data) that determines the motion mode of the board movable body 15, and controls the motion of the board movable body 15 according to the motion pattern data. Data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107 , and in that case, the CPU may be caused to control the lighting of the lamp and the operation control of the movable board 15 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Also, the sub-control board 90 is connected with an effect button detection switch (SW) 63a and a select button detection switch 64a. The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pushed, a detection signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the effect button detection switch 63a. The select button detection switch 64a detects that the select button 64 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 64 is pressed, a detection signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the select button detection switch 64a.

4 and 5 are functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1, and the boards shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 are not the only ones provided. Except for the main control board 80, any one or more of the boards shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 may be configured as one board, or one board shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 may be configured as a plurality of boards. good.

3. Main Games in Gaming Machine Next, main games performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 acquires a special figure related random number based on the winning to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加As shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure-related random numbers include jackpot random numbers, symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers. The jackpot random number is used for judging whether a big hit is right or wrong or whether a small hit is right or wrong. The jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0-65535. The symbol type random number is used for determining the type of the jackpot symbol, determining the type of the small winning symbol, and determining the type of the losing symbol. The symbol type random number takes a value in the range of 0-199.

Also, the reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable effect indicating the result when the result of the success/failure determination is a loss. A reach is a state in which only one of a plurality of performance symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and a jackpot is won depending on which symbol the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of the shown production patterns. Note that the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are slightly swaying within the display screen 50a, or may be displayed so as to repeat enlargement and reduction. The reach random number takes a value in the range of 0-255.

Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. Note that the random number is also referred to as determination information.

Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) shown in FIG. The normal symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range from 0 to 65535.

The pachinko game machine 1 judges the jackpot random number acquired based on the winning to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. And, it determines whether or not it is a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7(A), the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) based on the winning of the first starting opening 20 and the second special symbol (special figure 1) based on the winning of the second starting opening 21 In the lottery of 2), the probability of winning the big prize is the same, but the probability of winning the small prize is different. Specifically, the special figure 2 lottery is easier to win a small hit than the special figure 1 lottery. In addition, in this form, in the lottery of the special figure 2, it is configured to be easier to win a small hit than a big hit.

When the pachinko game machine 1 determines that the jackpot has been won, the symbol type random number is determined according to the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 7B, thereby determining the jackpot symbol type. In this form, in the lottery of special figure 1, at a rate of 100%, "special figure 1_jackpot design A" is determined. On the other hand, in the lottery of special figure 2, at a rate of 100%, "special figure 2_jackpot design B" is determined. In addition, when the type of the winning jackpot pattern is different, the opening pattern of the jackpot in the jackpot game of one type may be different.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines that the small winning is won, the symbol type random number is determined according to the small winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 7(C), thereby determining the type of the small winning symbol. In the lottery of special figure 2, at a rate of 100%, "special figure 2 _ small winning pattern a" is determined. In this form, there is one type of small winning pattern, but if there are multiple types of small winning patterns, if the type of the winning small winning pattern is different, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the two-type big winning game It may be different. Also, depending on the type of the winning small winning symbol, the settings regarding the small winning game and the game state after the big winning game may be changed.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines that neither the big win nor the small win has been won (that is, when it is determined as a loss), the symbol type random number is determined according to the losing symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 7(D). By doing so, the type of the lost symbol is determined. In the lottery of special figure 1, at a rate of 99.5%, "special figure 1_losing pattern A" is decided, and at a rate of 0.5%, "special figure 1_losing pattern B" is decided. On the other hand, in the lottery of special figure 2, at a rate of 90%, "special figure 2_losing design C" is determined, and at a rate of 10%, "special figure 2_losing design D" is determined. The difference in the types of the losing symbols may affect the settings regarding the gaming state after the stopping and displaying of the losing symbols. This point will be described later.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 determines that it is a loss (normal loss described later), the reach random number is determined according to the reach determination table shown in FIG. Decide whether to reach or not. The probability that it is determined that there is a reach differs depending on whether or not the gaming state is a time-saving state (advantageous gaming state, easy-entering gaming state), which will be described later. With this form, the direction when it is not a time-saving state has a higher probability of being determined with reach than the time when it is a time-saving state.

Next, types of big wins, types of small wins, and types of losses will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. As described above, the results of the special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2) include "big hit", "small hit", and "losing". In the case of a "big hit", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying the "big hit pattern". The jackpot patterns include "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" and "special figure 2_jackpot pattern B". Also, at the time of the "small win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying the "small win symbol". The small winning design includes "special figure 2_small winning design a". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". The lost symbols include "special figure 1_missing symbol A", "special figure 1_missing symbol B", "special figure 2_missing symbol C", and "special figure 2_missing symbol D".

When a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, a "big win game" is executed to open the first big prize winning port 30 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed big win symbol. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed to open the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed small win symbols. Then, when the game ball enters the specific area 39 in the second big winning hole 35 during execution of the small winning game, the first big winning hole 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning small winning pattern. A "jackpot game" to be opened is executed. A jackpot game executed based on the fact that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot winning is called a first-class jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on passing through the specific area 39 is called a second-class jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), the opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends. (also referred to as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning hole between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

In addition, in this form, the small winning game is a small winning opening game that opens the second big winning opening 35, the opening (interval before opening) before the small winning opening game is started, and the small winning opening game is completed. Later ending (post-closure interval).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, when a jackpot is won (that is, when a type 1 jackpot is won), a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) for opening the first jackpot 30 is executed. In this form, as shown in FIG. 8, the type of the jackpot pattern (the jackpot pattern stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display 41a) that can be won in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and the second special The types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b) that can be won in the lottery of the symbols (special figure 2) are each one type. Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 1, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 1_jackpot design A". Also, in the lottery of special figure 2, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 2_jackpot design B".

As shown in FIG. 8, "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" is a 4R (round) jackpot, the number of openings of the first big prize opening 30 per 1R is 1, and the maximum opening time is 29.5. seconds. The game state after the jackpot game when the "jackpot symbol A" is won is the later-described "time-saving state". Then, in the time saving state based on the "jackpot pattern A", the number of times of time saving is set to one. The time-saving number of times is the upper limit execution number of symbol variations accompanied by special symbol variation display and stop display that can be executed in the time-saving state. Details of the game state will be described later.

In addition, "special figure 2_jackpot pattern B" is a 10R jackpot, the number of opening times of the first big winning hole 30 per 1R is 1, and the maximum opening time is 29.5 seconds. The game state after the big win game when the "big win symbol B" is won is the "time-saving state" described later. Then, in the time saving state based on the "jackpot pattern A", the number of times of time saving is set to 6 times.

Further, when a small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once. When the game ball enters the second big winning port 35 opened by the small winning game and passes through the specific area 39 in the second big winning device 36, the big winning is won, and the first big winning game is won. A jackpot game (2 types of jackpot game) for opening the big winning opening 30 is executed. When this jackpot game (jackpot game triggered by passing through the specific area 39) is executed, the opening of the second big prize opening 35 as a small jackpot game corresponds to the first R. In addition, if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 in the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed. In this specification, a big hit game and a small hit game may be called a special game. In addition, in the special game, there may be a round in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round.

In this form, as shown in FIG. 8, there are 0 types of small winning patterns (small winning patterns stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a) that can be won in the lottery of special figure 1, and special figure 2. There is one type of small winning symbol (a small winning symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b) that can be won in the lottery. Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 2_small winning pattern a".

"Small winning pattern a" is a small winning that can always pass through V. Whether or not it is possible to pass the V during execution of the small winning game is determined by the operating pattern of the distribution member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 37 .

In addition, in the two-kind jackpot game based on the winning of the "small hit pattern a", the first big prize winning opening 30 is opened once per 1R from the 2nd round to the 11th round with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds. In other words, a 10R double jackpot game is executed. The game state after execution of this two-type jackpot game is controlled to the later-described "time-saving state". Then, in the time saving state based on the "small winning pattern a", the number of times of time saving is set to 6 times.

Further, when the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a loss (unspecified result), the type of the loss symbol is determined. As shown in FIG. 9, the type of the losing pattern determined by the lottery of the special figure 1 (the losing pattern stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and the type of the losing pattern determined by the lottery of the special figure 2 ( There are two kinds of types of the lost symbols stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b. Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 1, it is determined to be either "special figure 1_losing pattern A" or "special figure 1_losing pattern B". Also, in the lottery of special figure 2, it is determined to be either "special figure 2_losing pattern C" or "special figure 2_losing pattern D".

"Special Figure 1_Losing Design A" and "Special Figure 2_Losing Design C" are normal losers, and "Special Figure 1_Losing Design B" and "Special Figure 2_Losing Design D" are special losers. A special loss is a loss that can be a control opportunity for a time saving state described later. That is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special loss, the game control microcomputer 81 may control the game state after the stop display of the losing symbol to the time saving state. For this reason, the special loss is also called a time saving loss. It should be noted that "special figure 1_losing design B" and "special figure 2_losing design D" are examples of non-specific modes relating to the stop mode of the special symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, there are two lost symbol type determination tables depending on the game state. FIG. 9A is a losing symbol type determination table for the non-time saving state (normal game state), and FIG. 9B is a losing symbol type determination table for the time saving state.

As shown in the lost pattern type determination table for the non-time-saving state (for normal gaming state) in FIG. In the time saving state based on ", the number of times of working time saving is set to once. In addition, in the time saving state based on the "special figure 2_loss pattern D" in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state, the number of times of time saving is set to 6 times. Also, as shown in the lost pattern type determination table for the time saving state of FIG. times. In addition, in the time saving state based on the "special figure 2_loss pattern D" in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the time saving state, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times.

Here, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In this form, there are a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state as game states. The non-time-saving state is also referred to as a normal game state. When the pachinko game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a non-time-saving state (normal game state). The time-saving state is a game state in which game balls are more likely to enter the electric chew 22 than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state. Furthermore, the more the number of times of time saving set for the time saving state, the longer the game state in which the game balls are more likely to enter the electric chew 22 will continue. For this reason, it can be said that the time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is set is more advantageous to the player.

And in this form, in the time saving state based on the special loss in the lottery of the special figure 2, the number of time saving times tends to be greater than the time saving state based on the special loss in the lottery of the special figure 1. That is, in the time saving state based on the special loss in the lottery of the special figure 2, it tends to be more advantageous to the player than the time saving state based on the special loss in the lottery of the special figure 1.

Furthermore, in this form, "Special figure 2 _ Lost pattern D" is more time-saving when it is determined by lottery in the time-saving state than when it is determined by lottery in the non-time-saving state. tend to be many. That is, in this form, even if it is a special loss of the same type, when it is determined by lottery in a non-time saving state and when it is determined by lottery in a time saving state, the number of time saving times to be set may be different. . And even if it is a special loss of the same type, when it is decided by lottery in the time saving state, the time saving state set after that is more advantageous to the player than when it is decided by lottery in the non-time saving state. tend to become

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the number of times of variable display of special symbols stopped in a predetermined stop mode (the number of times of variable display of special symbols) reaches a predetermined number of times, it may be controlled to a time saving state. . That is, the pattern variation of special symbols that is not the trigger for the execution of the jackpot game (that is, the lottery results of the special symbols (special symbols 1 and 2) are small hits and jackpots) (stop the special symbols in a predetermined non-specific manner When the variable display to display) is continuous, the continuous number (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the non-specific variation number) is controlled to the time saving state when it reaches a predetermined number of times of saving time (prescribed number of times). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the pattern fluctuation of the special pattern that the lottery result of the special pattern is lost continues, when the number of consecutive times reaches the predetermined number of times of shortening of working hours, it is controlled to the shortening of working hours. will be And when it reaches|attains the time reduction provision frequency|count, as shown to the time reduction setting table for time reduction provision frequency|count reach|attainment of FIG. 10, a game state after that is controlled by a time reduction state. That is, when the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours, even if it is usually lost, it is controlled to the shortening of working hours state. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in the time saving setting table for reaching the number of time reductions given in FIG. is set to In addition, the specific value of the time saving frequency set when the time saving state is controlled according to the non-specific fluctuation frequency reaching the time saving giving frequency can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of time reductions set when the number of times of non-specific fluctuations is controlled to the time reduction state according to the number of times of time reduction granting is, for example, the denominator of the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state at the maximum 3 .8 times or less is possible. Note that the number of non-specific fluctuations corresponds to the "non-specific number of times".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, the number of times of shortening of working hours is set to 600 times. That is, the pachinko game machine 1 counts the number of non-specific fluctuations, and when the count value reaches 600, the number of times of time saving is controlled to one time saving state. In addition, in this form, the count value of the number of times of non-specific variation is reset according to the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, the count value of the number of specified fluctuations is counted for both symbol variation in the time saving state and symbol variation in the non-time saving state (normal game state). This point will be described in detail later. In addition, the specific value of the number of times of shortening working hours can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of time reduction grants can be set to a value between 2.5 times and 3 times the reciprocal of the jackpot winning probability, for example.

Next, the time saving state will be described in more detail. In the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 11(A), the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-time-saving state. In this form, it is not determined to be hit in the normal symbol lottery in the non-time saving state, but it is determined to be almost hit in the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 operates.

Further, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 11(B), the normal pattern variation time is shorter than in the non-working time saving state. In this form, the variation time of the normal pattern is 10 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 2 seconds in the time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variable time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operates.

In addition, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 11(C), the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. In this form, the opening time of the electric chew 22 is 0.1 seconds per time in the non-time saving state, but it is 2 seconds in the time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22 is activated.

Also, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 11(C), the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game may be greater than in the non-time saving state. In the present embodiment, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened is once in the non-time saving state and twice in the time saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, the function of increasing the number of openings of the electric tube 22 is activated.

Under the circumstances where the probability variation function of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22, and the opening number increasing function of the electric chew 22 are operating, these As compared with the case where the function is not activated, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these functions are activated (that is, time-saving state) is also referred to as a "high-based state", and the state that these functions are not activated (ie, non-time-saving state) is also referred to as a "low-based state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called an electric support control state. The low base state is also referred to as a non-electric support control state. The time saving state (high base state) corresponds to the "specific game state".

It should be noted that not all the functions described above need to operate in the time saving state (high base state). That is, one or more of the probability variation function of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22, and the opening number increasing function of the electric chew 22 It is only necessary that the operation makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 related to the electric chew 22 than when the function is not in operation. That is, for example, the probability variation function of the normal symbol display device 42 may not operate.

In addition, the time saving state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times of execution, or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. The upper limit number of times of execution (time saving number of times) can be determined based on the type of special symbol that triggered the control of the time saving state and the game state at the time of determination of the special symbol (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

In addition, in the time-saving state, a plurality of different probability variation functions of the normal symbol display device 42, variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display device 42, opening time extension function of electric chew 22, and increasing function of opening number of electric chew 22 may be provided. That is, it is possible to provide a plurality of time-saving states with different easiness of winning a game ball to the second starting port 21 . Which of the plurality of time saving states is controlled may be determined by a special pattern that triggered the control of the time saving state, a game state at the time of lottery of the special pattern, or the like.

In the time-saving state (high base state), the game can be played more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (see FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. This is because the electrical sapo control makes it easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. . Therefore, the game ball is passed to the gate 28 which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit to the right to win the game ball to the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the non-time-saving state (low base state), the game can be progressed advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (see FIG. 1) by striking to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. It is because Therefore, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first starting port 20.例文帳に追加This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

Next, determination of a special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 determines a special figure variation pattern according to a different special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state and the time saving state (see FIGS. 12 and 13). The special figure variation pattern determination table in the time saving state (FIG. 13) is a table in which the variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected than the special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12).

Also, in this form, for the special figure 1 lottery, if you draw a "loss pattern B" that is a special loss (time saving loss) in a non-time saving state, a special figure variation pattern P8 is selected, and in a time saving state " When the "losing pattern B" is drawn, the special figure variation pattern P18 is selected. Also, regarding the lottery of special figure 2, if you draw a "loss pattern D" that is a special loss (time saving loss) in a non-time saving state, a special figure fluctuation pattern P24 is selected, and in a time saving state "losing pattern D " is drawn, the special figure variation pattern P34 is selected. When the special figure variation pattern P8 is selected by pulling the "loss pattern B" in the non-time saving state, normal reach is executed. Also, when the special figure variation pattern P18 is selected by drawing the "losing pattern B" in the time saving state, the special figure variation patterns P24 and P34 are selected by drawing the "losing pattern D" in the time saving state or non-time saving state. In that case, battle reach is executed, and a time saving rush production may be executed. Note that these points will be described later.

4. About Start Winning Command The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a so-called look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect is a special figure fluctuation based on the start prize (variation display of special symbols) using the start prize command specified based on the judgment information (random number such as a jackpot random number) acquired by the start prize. It is an effect that suggests the winning probability (high possibility of winning a jackpot) for the start winning before the winning judgment just before the start of the game.

As shown in FIG. 14, the start winning command generated in this embodiment includes a big win, a small win (V passage is allowed), a normal loss, and a short time loss (special loss). lottery result information is included. Further, the start winning command of the present embodiment includes start opening information indicating which of the first start opening 20 and the second start opening 21 has won. Note that the starting winning command only needs to include the lottery result information, and it is possible to appropriately change what kind of information is to be included in the starting winning command in addition to the lottery result information.

5. Concerning Fluctuation Production Pattern In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to execute a predetermined production based on the special figure fluctuation pattern. The variation performance pattern (fluctuation performance pattern) is determined by the performance control microcomputer 91 according to each variation performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. Concretely, in the non-time-saving state, the variable performance pattern related to the losing design is determined according to the variable performance pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 15(A). In the time saving state in which the remaining number of times of time saving is 2 or more, the variable effect pattern related to the losing pattern is determined according to the variable effect pattern determination table for the time saving state of 2 or more remaining times of time saving shown in FIG. 15(B). In the time saving state in which the remaining number of times of time saving is 1, the variable effect pattern related to the losing pattern is determined according to the variable effect pattern determination table for the time saving state with the remaining number of times of time saving of 1 shown in FIG. 15(C).

In addition, in the non-time saving state and the time saving state in which the remaining number of time saving is 1, the time saving rush performance may be performed. The time-saving rush production is a production of contents suggesting that it will be transferred to the time-saving state after that. Specifically, the time-saving rush effect is, in a non-time-saving state, when a special drawing of a special drawing draws a special loss (time-saving loss), “Special Figure 2_Losing Pattern D”, after the battle reach is started, 100 % chance of execution. In addition, in the time-saving rush effect, in the time-saving state where the remaining number of times of time-saving is 1, a special drawing (time-saving loss) is drawn in the special lottery. has a 100% chance of being executed after Battlereach has started. Then, in the case of this special loss, a success mode is performed as a time-saving rush effect. In addition, the time-saving rush production is a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state in which the number of remaining time-savings is 1. If you draw a special figure 2 lottery, which is usually lost, "special figure 2_losing pattern C", Battle reach has a 50% chance of being executed after is started. In the case of this normal failure, a failure mode is performed as a time-saving rush effect. That is, the time-saving rush effect is performed in a success mode in the case of a special loss, and performed in a failure mode in the case of a normal loss. In addition, in the time saving state in which the remaining number of times of time saving is 2 or more, the time saving rush production is not performed. In addition, in the non-time-saving state, when the special figure 1_losing pattern B, which is a special loss (time-saving loss), is drawn in the special figure lottery, the time-saving rush performance is not performed, and the normal reach is performed.

6. Icons (Suspended Icons, Pertinent Icons) Next, icons (suspended icons, pertinent icons) displayed on the image display device 50 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 26 . Also, the pending icon and the corresponding icon are collectively referred to as pending display. It should be noted that the icon is an image corresponding to the special symbol, which is currently being variably displayed, showing the determination result of the big hit determination. In addition, the pending icon is an image corresponding to the special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation, special figure 2 reservation) indicating that the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) is withheld is. Note that the icon (holding icon, the icon) corresponds to the "predetermined icon".

First, types of icons (suspended icon, relevant icon) according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 16 . The icons (suspended icon, relevant icon) of the first embodiment include a normal icon (normal suspended icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) that is an icon in a normal display mode, and a first special icon that is an icon in a first special display mode. There are icons (first special pending icon HA1, first special relevant icon TA1) and second special icons (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) that are icons in the second special display mode.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the display mode of the normal icon (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA), which is the icon in the normal display mode of the first embodiment, is a display mode showing a white "O". It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 16B, the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1, first special relevant icon TA1) includes the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1a) of the first special display mode A. , first special relevant icon TA1a), first special icon of first special display mode B (first special pending icon HA1b, first special relevant icon TA1b), and first special icon of first special display mode C ( There are three types: a first special pending icon HA1c and a first special concerned icon TA1c). The first special display mode (first special display mode A, first special display mode B, first special display mode C) corresponds to the "first display mode".

As shown in FIG. 16B-1, the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1a, first special relevant icon TA1a) of the first special display mode A is an icon representing a white star. . Further, as shown in FIG. 16B-2, the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1b, first special corresponding icon TA1b) of the first special display mode B is an icon showing a blue star. ing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16B-3, the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1c, first special corresponding icon TA1c) of the first special display mode C is an icon showing a green star. ing.

As shown in FIG. 16C, the second special icon (second special hold icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) in the second special display mode is an icon imitating a microphone. Note that the second special display mode (display mode imitating a microphone) corresponds to the "second display mode".

In the first embodiment, the display mode of the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is not changed. Along with the display of the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2), in the vicinity of the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) A production character may be displayed. Accompanied by the display of the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2), production in the vicinity of the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) The display of the character suggests to the player that the possibility of winning a big win is higher than when only the second special icon (the second special hold icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2) is displayed. It is possible to

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, effect characters that can be displayed when displayed on the second special icon (second special hold icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) will be described. The production character of the first embodiment functions to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win to the player.

When displayed on the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2), accompanying the display of the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) The production characters that can be displayed in the . There is a third production character KY3 (see FIG. 17C), which is a professional wrestler character. Note that in the first embodiment, the second effect character KY2 has a higher expectation for a big win than the first effect character KY1. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher for the third effect character KY3 than for the second effect character KY2. Note that the production character KY corresponds to the "attached image". Also, the first production character KY1 corresponds to the "first accompanying image", and the second production character KY2 corresponds to the "second accompanying image".

In the first embodiment, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays the second special icon TA2 and the production character KY (the first production character KY1, the second production character KY2, and the third production character KY3). Then, a dialogue image SG showing the dialogue of the production character KY (the first production character KY1, the second production character KY2, and the third production character KY3) is displayed to suggest the possibility of a big win during the fluctuation. is possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the dialogue image SG by the effect character displayed accompanying the display of the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) will be described. The dialogue image SG of the first embodiment functions to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win to the player. Note that the dialogue image SG includes a first dialogue image SG1 (see FIG. 18A) indicating "good feeling", a second dialogue image SG2 (see FIG. 18B) indicating "chance", and " It's hot!" (see FIG. 18C). In the first embodiment, the second serif image SG2 (see FIG. 18(B)) has a higher expectation for a big win than the first serif image SG1 (see FIG. 18(A)). Also, the expectation for the big win is higher for the third dialogue image SG3 (see FIG. 18(C)) than for the second dialogue image SG2 (see FIG. 18(B)). Note that the serif image SG corresponds to the "related image". Also, the first dialogue image SG1 corresponds to the "first related image", and the second dialogue image SG2 corresponds to the "second related image".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a display pattern from the start of the display of the suspended icon or the icon until the display of the icon ends is collectively selected as a scenario. As shown in FIG. 19, there are seven types of scenario patterns for icon display, scenario pattern 1 to scenario pattern 7 . In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by executing the icon change effect (holding change effect, the change effect), the normal icon (normal hold icon HA, the normal icon TA) is the second icon with a high probability of big hit. 1 special icon (first special reserved icon HA1, first special relevant icon TA1) or second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2). Here, the icon change effect (holding change effect, the change effect) not only functions as an effect that suggests the lottery result of the special lottery for the special figure 2 reservation, but also the lottery result of the special lottery for the special figure 2 reservation It also functions as an effect for suggesting in advance (so-called prefetch effect based on the result of prefetch determination).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, icon change effects (suspended change effect, relevant change effect) are executed from the normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA), and the first special icon (first special After being changed to the reserved icon HA1, the first special relevant icon TA1), an icon change effect (suspended change effect, the relevant change effect) is further executed, and the first special icon (the first special reserved icon HA1, the first special The display mode of the icon TA1) may be changed to a display mode with a higher expectation of a big win.

Each scenario pattern shown in FIG. 10 will now be described. First, in scenario pattern 1, the normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed as the initial mode of the icons (suspended icon, relevant icon), and the normal icon (normal pending icon HA) is displayed without changing the display mode. , the normal icon TA) continues to be displayed.

Next, in scenario pattern 2, normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed as initial modes of icons (suspended icon, relevant icon), and the display mode changes to first special display mode A. , the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1a, first special corresponding icon TA1a) of the first special display mode A continues to be displayed. Further, in scenario pattern 3, normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed as the initial mode of the icons (suspended icon, relevant icon), and the display mode changes to the first special display mode A, A first special icon (first special pending icon HA1a, first special corresponding icon TA1a) of 1 special display mode A is displayed, and further the display mode changes to the first special display mode B, and the first special display mode B is displayed. In this scenario, the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1b, first special corresponding icon TA1b) continues to be displayed. Further, in scenario pattern 3, normal icons (normally suspended icon HA, normally concerned icon TA) are displayed as initial modes of icons (suspended icon, relevant icon), and the display mode changes to first special display mode A. Then, the first special icon (the first special pending icon HA1a, the first special corresponding icon TA1a) of the first special display mode A is displayed, and the display mode changes to the first special display mode C and the first special display mode In this scenario, the C first special icon (first special pending icon HA1c, first special corresponding icon TA1c) continues to be displayed. That is, from scenario pattern 2 to scenario pattern 4, the icon change effects (suspended change effect, relevant change effect) are executed from the normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA), and the first special icon (first It is a scenario pattern that changes to the special hold icon HA1, the first special relevant icon TA1).

Further, in scenario pattern 5, normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed as the initial mode of the icons (suspended icon, relevant icon), and the display mode changes to the second special display mode. In this scenario, special icons (second special reserved icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) continue to be displayed. Further, in scenario pattern 6, normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed as the initial mode of the icons (suspended icon, relevant icon), and the display mode changes to the second special display mode. A special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) is displayed, and a first effect character KY1 is attached to the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2). is displayed, and the second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) and first effect character KY1 are continuously displayed. Further, in scenario pattern 7, normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed as the initial mode of the icons (suspended icon, relevant icon), and the display mode changes to the second special display mode. Special icons (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) are displayed, and first effect character KY1 is displayed along with the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2). After that, the first effect character KY1 is replaced by the second effect character KY2, and finally the second special icon TA2 and the second effect character KY2 are displayed. Further, in scenario pattern 8, normal icons (normally suspended icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed as the initial mode of the icons (suspended icon, relevant icon), and the display mode changes to the second special display mode. Special icons (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) are displayed, and first effect character KY1 is displayed along with the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2). After that, the first effect character KY1 is replaced by the third effect character KY3, and finally the second special corresponding icon TA2 and the third effect character KY3 are displayed. That is, in scenario patterns 5 to 8, icon change effects (suspended change effect, relevant change effect) are executed from normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA), and second special icons (second It is a scenario pattern that changes to a special hold icon HA2 and a second special relevant icon TA2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the scenario pattern 1 is a scenario pattern in which the display mode of icons (suspended icons, relevant icons) does not change. In scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 5, scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, and scenario pattern 8, one icon change effect (suspended change effect, the change effect) is executed, and the icon (suspended icon , the icon) is changed once. Scenario pattern 3 and scenario pattern 4 are scenario patterns in which two icon change effects (suspended change effect, relevant change effect) are executed, and the display mode of the icon (suspended icon, relevant icon) changes twice. The icons in the normal display mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are then followed by the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1, first special relevant icon TA1), or the first It functions as an icon that can suggest that there is a possibility of changing to two special icons (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display mode of the second special icon (the second special hold icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2) changes in scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, and scenario pattern 8. This is a scenario pattern in which the first production character KY1 is displayed in association with the second special icon (the second special reserved icon HA2, the second special relevant icon TA2). The second special icon (the second special hold icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes the production character KY (the first production character KY1, the second production It functions as an icon that can suggest that the character KY2 and the third effect character KY3) may be displayed.

Scenario pattern 7 and scenario pattern 8 consist of the first effect character KY1 displayed in association with the second special icon (the second special hold icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2), the second effect character This is a scenario pattern in which KY2 or the third production character KY3 is substituted. The first effect character KY1 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is the first effect character displayed accompanying the display of the second special icon TA2 when the second special icon TA2 is displayed. It functions as a production character capable of suggesting the possibility that KY1 will be replaced by a second production character KY2 or a third production character KY3.

7. Scenario Next, while the normal effect mode is being set, in the starting winning process (S4402) of FIG. will be used for explanation. As shown in FIG. 20, when the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H" (see FIG. 14), the probability that scenario pattern 1 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "5%", the probability that scenario pattern 2 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "7%", the probability that scenario pattern 3 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "10%", The probability that scenario pattern 4 is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 is 23%, and the probability that scenario pattern 5 is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 is 7%. The probability that the scenario pattern 6 is selected is "10%", the probability that the scenario pattern 7 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "15%", and the scenario pattern 8 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. The probability that the

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "02H" (see FIG. 14), the probability that scenario pattern 1 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. is "24%", the probability that the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the scenario pattern 2 is "15%", and the probability that the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the scenario pattern 3 is "10%". Yes, the probability that scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "3%", and the probability that scenario pattern 5 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "20%". The probability that scenario pattern 6 is selected by 91 is "15%", the probability that scenario pattern 7 is selected by production control microcomputer 91 is "10%", and scenario pattern 8 is selected by production control microcomputer 91. The probability of being selected is "3%".

Also, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "03H" (see FIG. 14), the probability that scenario pattern 1 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. is "100%".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H" (see FIG. 14), the probability that scenario pattern 1 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. is "5%", the probability that scenario pattern 2 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "7%", and the probability that scenario pattern 3 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "10%". , the probability that scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is 23%, and the probability that scenario pattern 5 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is 7%. The probability that the scenario pattern 6 is selected by 91 is "10%", the probability that the scenario pattern 7 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "15%", and the scenario pattern 8 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. The probability of being selected is "23%".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, when the second starting winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "02H" (see FIG. 14), the probability that scenario pattern 1 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. is "5%", the probability that scenario pattern 2 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "7%", and the probability that scenario pattern 3 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "10%". , the probability that scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is 23%, and the probability that scenario pattern 5 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is 7%. The probability that the scenario pattern 6 is selected by 91 is "10%", the probability that the scenario pattern 7 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "15%", and the scenario pattern 8 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. The probability of being selected is "23%".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "03H" (see FIG. 14), the probability that scenario pattern 1 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. is "24%", the probability that the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the scenario pattern 2 is "15%", and the probability that the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the scenario pattern 3 is "10%". Yes, the probability that scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "3%", and the probability that scenario pattern 5 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is "20%". The probability that scenario pattern 6 is selected by 91 is "15%", the probability that scenario pattern 7 is selected by production control microcomputer 91 is "10%", and scenario pattern 8 is selected by production control microcomputer 91. The probability of being selected is "3%".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "04H" (see FIG. 14), the probability that scenario pattern 1 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. is "100%".

According to the explanation using the scenario pattern selection table shown in FIG. Scenario pattern 4 or scenario pattern 8 is likely to be selected. That is, when the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1c, first special relevant icon TA1c) of the first special display mode C is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, or when the second special icon (first When the 2nd special reserved icon HA2, the 2nd special corresponding icon TA2) and the 3rd production character KY3 are displayed, the expectation of a big win is very high.

Further, in this embodiment, the scenario pattern 7 is more likely to be selected when the information indicated by the starting prize command indicates winning than when the information indicated by the starting prize command indicates loss. That is, when the second special icon (the second special reserved icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2) and the second effect character KY2 are displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the expectation for the big win is high. become.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2 and scenario pattern 1 5 or scenario pattern 6, either scenario pattern is likely to be selected. Thus, in this embodiment, when the first special icon (first special pending icon HA1, first special corresponding icon TA1) is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the second special icon (second When the special pending icon HA2, the second special relevant icon TA2) is displayed, the normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed, the normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) are displayed. TA) is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot is the lowest. Further, when the first special icon (the first special pending icon HA1a, the first special corresponding icon TA1a) of the first special display mode A is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the first special display mode The expectation for the big win is lower than when the first special icon of B (first special reserved icon HA1b, first special corresponding icon TA1b) is displayed. Further, when only the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2 , the second special icon TA2) and the first effect character KY1 are displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win is lower than in the case where the first effect character KY1 is displayed. Further, when the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) and first effect character KY1 are displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the second special icon (second 2 special reserved icon HA2, 2nd special corresponding icon TA2) and 2nd effect character KY2 are displayed, the expectation for big win is lower than that.

Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 in accordance with the start winning command determined by the game control microcomputer 81 will be described. The production control microcomputer 91 can execute the change opportunity production in parallel with the variation production in the non-time saving state. The change opportunity effect is a effect that may be performed when the normal icon TA or the normal reserved icon HA changes to a different display mode.

The change trigger effect of this embodiment is a effect in which the change trigger image MY is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 before the normal icon TA or the normal pending icon HA changes. Further, in the present embodiment, when the change opportunity effect is performed, thereafter, the icon change effect (suspended change effect, the change effect) in which the display mode of the icon or the display mode of the suspended icon is changed is performed. The change opportunity effect of this form functions as an effect that suggests that the icon change effect (suspended change effect, the change effect) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pending icon and the icon by the change opportunity presentation. Then, it is possible to perform an icon change effect (suspended change effect, the change effect) in a state in which the player's attention is directed to the pending icon or the icon.

There is one type of change opportunity production, as shown in the change opportunity production selection table shown in FIG. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 can select whether or not to execute the change opportunity production using the change opportunity production selection table shown in FIG.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the present embodiment refers to the scenario pattern selected by the start winning prize command and the scenario pattern selection table in step S4403 (variation opportunity effect selection process), based on the change opportunity effect selection table, Select whether or not to execute the change opportunity production. Specifically, scenario pattern 1 is selected regardless of whether the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" or the lower command "01H", "02H", or "03H". , non-execution of the change opportunity presentation is selected at a rate of "100%". Further, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", the scenario pattern 2 is selected. , execution of the change opportunity presentation is selected at a rate of “100%”. Further, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", the scenario pattern 3 is selected. , execution of the change opportunity presentation is selected at a rate of “100%”. Further, even if the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", or "03H", the scenario pattern 4 is selected. , execution of the change opportunity presentation is selected at a rate of “100%”. Further, even if the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", or "03H", the scenario pattern 5 is selected. , execution of the change opportunity presentation is selected at a rate of “100%”. Further, even if the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", the scenario pattern 6 is selected. , execution of the change opportunity presentation is selected at a rate of “100%”. Further, even if the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", or "03H", the scenario pattern 7 is selected. , execution of the change opportunity presentation is selected at a rate of “100%”. Further, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", the scenario pattern 8 is selected. , execution of the change opportunity presentation is selected at a rate of “100%”.

Further, scenario pattern 1 is selected even when the second starting winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". In this case, non-execution of the change opportunity effect is selected at a rate of "100%". Further, scenario pattern 2 is selected even when the second starting winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". In this case, execution of the change opportunity effect is selected at a rate of "100%". Further, scenario pattern 3 is selected even when the second starting winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". In this case, execution of the change opportunity effect is selected at a rate of "100%". Further, scenario pattern 4 is selected even when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". In this case, execution of the change opportunity effect is selected at a rate of "100%". Further, scenario pattern 5 is selected even when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". In this case, execution of the change opportunity effect is selected at a rate of "100%". In addition, scenario pattern 6 is selected when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and any of the lower commands "01H", "02H", "03H", or "04H". In this case, execution of the change opportunity effect is selected at a rate of "100%". In addition, scenario pattern 7 is selected when the second starting winning command is the upper command "E2H" and any of the lower commands "01H", "02H", "03H", or "04H". In this case, execution of the change opportunity effect is selected at a rate of "100%". Further, scenario pattern 8 is selected even when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". In this case, execution of the change opportunity effect is selected at a rate of "100%".

8. Effect related to the second special icon Next, in response to the starting winning command determined by the game control microcomputer 81, the effect character accompanying effect and the effect character accompanying suggestive effect, which are the look-ahead effects that can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 and will be explained. The production control microcomputer 91 can execute the production character accompanying production in parallel with the variable production in the non-time saving state. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute the effect character-associated suggestive effect in parallel with the variable effect in the non-time-saving state.

Next, the effect character-associated suggestive effect selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The production control microcomputer 91 of the present embodiment refers to the start winning command and the scenario pattern selected by the scenario pattern selection table in step S4405 (production character-associated suggestion production process) to create a production character-associated suggestion production selection table. Based on this, it is selected whether or not to execute the effect character-associated suggestive effect. Specifically, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, No matter which scenario pattern is selected out of scenario pattern 3 or scenario pattern 4, the non-execution of the suggestive effect associated with the effect character is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22). In addition, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", when the scenario pattern 5 is selected, the effect Execution of character-associated suggestive effects is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22). In addition, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", when the scenario pattern 6 is selected, the effect Execution of character-associated suggestive effects is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22). In addition, even if the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", when the scenario pattern 7 is selected, the effect Execution of character-associated suggestive effects is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22). In addition, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", when the scenario pattern 8 is selected, the effect Execution of character-associated suggestive effects is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22).

Further, even if the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H", scenario pattern 1 and scenario pattern 2. No matter which scenario pattern is selected from scenario pattern 3 or scenario pattern 4, the non-execution of the effect character-associated suggestive effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22). Further, scenario pattern 5 is selected even when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". Execution of the suggestive effect associated with the effect character is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22). In addition, scenario pattern 6 is selected when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and any of the lower commands "01H", "02H", "03H", or "04H". Execution of the suggestive effect associated with the effect character is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22). In addition, scenario pattern 7 is selected when the second starting winning command is the upper command "E2H" and any of the lower commands "01H", "02H", "03H", or "04H". Execution of the suggestive effect associated with the effect character is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22). Further, scenario pattern 8 is selected even when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". Execution of the suggestive effect associated with the effect character is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 22).

According to the description of the effect character-associated suggestive effect selection table shown in FIG. 22, in the first embodiment, any one of scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 3, or scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. Even when is selected, the effect character-associated suggestive effect is not executed. In this embodiment, since the second special icon (the second special pending icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2) is not displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the suggestive effect associated with the effect character is not executed. Further, in the first embodiment, even if any scenario pattern is selected from scenario pattern 5, scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, or scenario pattern 8 by the effect control microcomputer 91, the suggestive effect associated with the effect character is produced. Always executed.

Next, the effect character accompanying effect selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the present embodiment refers to the start winning command and the scenario pattern selected by the scenario pattern selection table in step S4406 (effect character accompanying effect processing), based on the effect character accompanying effect selection table. , to select whether or not to execute the effect accompanying the effect character. Specifically, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, When either scenario pattern 3 or scenario pattern 4 is selected, non-execution of the effect character accompanying effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23). In addition, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", when the scenario pattern 5 is selected, the effect Non-execution of character-associated effects is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23). In addition, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", when the scenario pattern 6 is selected, the effect Execution of the character accompanying effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23). In addition, even if the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", when the scenario pattern 7 is selected, the effect Execution of the character accompanying effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23). In addition, even if the first start winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H" or "03H", when the scenario pattern 8 is selected, the effect Execution of the character accompanying effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23).

Further, even if the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H", scenario pattern 1 and scenario pattern 2. No matter which scenario pattern is selected from scenario pattern 3 or scenario pattern 4, non-execution of the effect character accompanying effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23). Further, scenario pattern 5 is selected even when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". When the character-associated effect is not executed, the ratio of "100%" is selected (see FIG. 23). In addition, scenario pattern 6 is selected when the second start winning command is the upper command "E2H" and any of the lower commands "01H", "02H", "03H", or "04H". Execution of the effect accompanying the effect character is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23). In addition, scenario pattern 7 is selected when the second starting winning command is the upper command "E2H" and any of the lower commands "01H", "02H", "03H", or "04H". Execution of the effect accompanying the effect character is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23). Further, scenario pattern 8 is selected even when the first starting winning command is the upper command "E1H" and the lower command "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H". Execution of the effect accompanying the effect character is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 23).

According to the explanation of the effect character-associated effect selection table shown in FIG. Even when the scenario pattern of is selected, the performance character accompanying performance is not executed. In this embodiment, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays a second special icon (a second special hold icon HA2, a second special corresponding icon TA2) and a production character KY (a first production character KY1, a second production character KY2, a Since the 3 production character KY3) is not displayed, the production character accompanying production is not executed. Further, in the first embodiment, even if any scenario pattern is selected from scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, or scenario pattern 8 by the production control microcomputer 91, the production character accompanying production is always executed.

Next, based on the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command selected by the game control microcomputer 81, the performance control microcomputer 91 can execute the performance character change performance and the performance character change suggesting performance in the variable performance. will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 can execute the effect character change effect in parallel with the variable effect in the non-time saving state. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control can perform the production|presentation character change suggestion production|presentation in parallel with the fluctuation|variation production|presentation in a non-time-saving state. In the first embodiment, when any scenario pattern is selected from scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 3, or scenario pattern 4, the production character change suggesting effect and the effect character change effect are performed. never executed.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of this embodiment selects according to the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command and the scenario pattern selection table in the effect character change suggestion effect process (S5008) of the change effect start process (S4408). By referring to the scenario pattern, it is selected whether or not to execute the effect character change suggesting effect. Specifically, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", "P7 or "P8", when the scenario pattern 5 is selected, non-execution of the effect character change suggesting effect is selected at a rate of "100%". . In addition, the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", "P7", or " P8", when the scenario pattern 6 is selected in any of the special figure 1 variation patterns, the execution of the performance character change suggesting effect is selected at a rate of "30%", and the effect character change suggesting effect is selected. is selected at a rate of "70%" (see FIG. 24). In addition, the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", "P7", or " P8", when the scenario pattern 7 is selected in any of the special figure 1 variation patterns, the execution of the effect character change suggesting effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 24). . In addition, the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", "P7", or " P8", when the scenario pattern 8 is selected in any one of the special figure 1 variation patterns, the execution of the effect character change suggestion effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 24). .

In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", "P22", "P23", or "P24", any special figure 2 variation pattern In some cases, when the scenario pattern 5 is selected, non-execution of the effect character change suggesting effect is selected at a rate of "100%". In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", "P22", "P23", or "P24", any special figure 1 variation pattern In one case, when the scenario pattern 6 is selected, the execution of the performance character change suggestion performance is selected at a rate of '30%' and the non-execution of the performance character change suggestion performance is selected at a rate of '70%'. (See FIG. 24). In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", "P22", "P23", or "P24", any special figure 2 variation pattern In some cases, when scenario pattern 7 is selected, execution of the effect character change suggesting effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 24). In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", "P22", "P23", or "P24", any special figure 2 variation pattern In some cases, when scenario pattern 8 is selected, execution of the effect character change suggesting effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 24).

According to the description of the effect character change suggestion effect selection table shown in FIG. No matter which scenario pattern is selected, the effect character change suggesting effect is not executed. In this embodiment, since the second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 are not displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the effect character change suggesting effect is not executed. Further, in the first embodiment, even when any of the scenario patterns 6, 7, and 8 is selected by the production control microcomputer 91, the production character change suggesting production is always executed. .

Effect control microcomputer 91 of the present embodiment, in the effect character change effect process (S5009) of the change effect start process (S4408), the scenario selected by the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the change start command and the scenario pattern selection table By referring to the pattern, it is selected whether or not to execute the effect character change effect. Specifically, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", "P7 ” or “P8”, when the scenario pattern 5 is selected in the case of one of the special figure 1 variation patterns, the non-execution of the production character change production is selected at a rate of “100%” ( See Figure 25). In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", "P7", Alternatively, when scenario pattern 6 is selected in any of the special figure 1 variation patterns of "P8", non-execution of the effect character change effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (Fig. 25 reference). In addition, the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", "P7", or " P8", when the scenario pattern 7 is selected in any one of the special figure 1 variation patterns, execution of the performance character change performance is selected at a rate of ``100%'' (see FIG. 25). In addition, the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", "P7", or " P8", when the scenario pattern 8 is selected in any one of the special figure 1 variation patterns, execution of the performance character change performance is selected at a rate of ``100%'' (see FIG. 25).

In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", "P22", "P23", or "P24", any special figure 2 variation pattern In some cases, when scenario pattern 5 is selected, non-execution of the effect character change effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 25). In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", "P22", "P23", or "P24", any special figure 2 variation pattern In some cases, when scenario pattern 6 is selected, non-execution of the effect character change effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 25). In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", "P22", "P23", or "P24", any special figure 2 variation pattern In some cases, when scenario pattern 7 is selected, execution of the effect character change effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 25). In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is a special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", "P22", "P23", or "P24", any special figure 2 variation pattern In some cases, when scenario pattern 8 is selected, execution of the effect character change effect is selected at a rate of "100%" (see FIG. 25).

According to the description of the effect character change effect selection table shown in FIG. No matter which of the scenario patterns is selected, the effect character change effect is not executed. In this embodiment, since the first effect character KY1 displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is not replaced with the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3, the effect character change suggesting effect is executed. never be Further, in the first embodiment, even if any scenario pattern is selected from scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, or scenario pattern 8 by the effect control microcomputer 91, the effect character change effect is always executed.

Next, based on the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command selected by the game control microcomputer 81, the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIG. do. The production control microcomputer 91 can execute the speech announcement production in parallel with the variable production in the non-time-saving state. Note that, in the first embodiment, even if any scenario pattern is selected from among scenario pattern 1, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 3, and scenario pattern 4, the dialogue announcement effect is not executed. .

The dialog preview effect pattern of the first embodiment includes a first dialog preview effect pattern, a second dialog preview effect pattern, a third dialog preview effect pattern, a fourth dialog preview effect pattern, and a fifth dialog preview effect pattern. , and the sixth line forewarning effect pattern.

Here, the first dialogue foretelling effect pattern is a dialogue foretelling effect pattern in which the first dialogue image SG1 is displayed in one dialogue foretelling effect performed during execution of the variable effect. Also, the second dialogue foretelling effect pattern is a dialogue foretelling effect pattern in which the second dialogue image SG2 is displayed in one dialogue foretelling effect performed during execution of the variable effect. Also, the third dialogue foretelling effect pattern is a dialogue foretelling effect pattern in which the third dialogue image SG3 is displayed in one dialogue foretelling effect performed during execution of the variable effect. In addition, the fourth dialogue forewarning effect pattern means that the first dialogue image SG1 is displayed in the first dialogue foretelling effect performed during execution of the variable performance, and the second dialogue image SG2 is displayed in the second dialogue foretelling effect. is displayed, which is a dialog announcement effect pattern. In addition, the fifth dialogue forewarning effect pattern means that the first dialogue image SG1 is displayed in the first dialogue foretelling effect performed during execution of the variable performance, and the third dialogue image SG3 is displayed in the second dialogue foretelling effect. is displayed, which is a dialog announcement effect pattern. Further, the sixth dialogue forewarning effect pattern means that the second dialogue image SG2 is displayed in the first dialogue foretelling effect performed during execution of the variable performance, and the third dialogue image SG3 is displayed in the second dialogue foretelling effect. is displayed, which is a dialog announcement effect pattern.

Effect control microcomputer 91 of the present embodiment, in the dialogue notice effect process (S5010) of the change effect start process (S4408), the scenario pattern selected by the special figure variation pattern information included in the variation start command and the scenario pattern selection table , and whether or not to execute the dialogue foretelling effect is selected based on the dialogue foretelling effect pattern selection table. Specifically, when the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", when the scenario pattern 6 is selected, the second The ratio of selection of the 1-line forewarning effect pattern is 29%, the ratio of selection of the 2nd-line forewarning effect pattern is 30%, and the ratio of selection of the 3rd-line forewarning effect pattern. is "1%", the rate of selection of the fourth line notice effect pattern is "34%", the rate of selection of the fifth line notice effect pattern is "5%", and the The percentage of selection of the 6-serif announcement effect pattern is "1%" (see FIG. 26).

Also, when the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", when the scenario pattern 7 is selected, the fourth line The percentage of selection of the announcement effect pattern is "40%", and the percentage of selection of the fifth line announcement effect pattern is "60%" (see FIG. 26).

Also, when the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", when the scenario pattern 8 is selected, the fifth line The percentage of selection of the announcement effect pattern is "30%", and the percentage of selection of the sixth line announcement effect pattern is "70%" (see FIG. 26).

In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure variation pattern "P6", special figure variation pattern "P7", or When one of the special figure 1 variation patterns is selected from the special figure variation patterns "P8", when the scenario pattern 6 is selected, the ratio of selecting the first line notice effect pattern is "75% , the rate of selection of the second line forewarning effect pattern is "10%", and the rate of selection of the fourth line forewarning effect pattern is "15%" (see FIG. 26).

In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure variation pattern "P6", special figure variation pattern "P7", or Among the special figure variation patterns "P8", when any special figure 1 variation pattern is selected, when the scenario pattern 7 is selected, the ratio of selecting the 4th line notice effect pattern is "90% , and the rate at which the fifth line announcement effect pattern is selected is "10%" (see FIG. 26).

In addition, the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure variation pattern "P6", special figure variation pattern "P7", or Of the special figure variation patterns "P8", when any special figure 1 variation pattern is selected, when the scenario pattern 8 is selected, the ratio of selecting the 5th line notice effect pattern is "90% , and the ratio of selection of the sixth line announcement effect pattern is "10%" (see FIG. 26).

When the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 2 variation pattern "P21" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", when the scenario pattern 6 is selected, the first line announcement effect The ratio of pattern selection is "29%", the ratio of selection of the second line notice effect pattern is "30%", and the proportion of selection of the third line notice effect pattern is "1". %”, the ratio of selection of the fourth line forewarning effect pattern is “34%”, the ratio of selection of the fifth line forewarning effect pattern is “5%”, and the sixth line forewarning effect The rate at which the pattern is selected is "1%" (see FIG. 26).

Also, when the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 2 variation pattern "P21" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", when the scenario pattern 7 is selected, the fourth line The percentage of selection of the announcement effect pattern is "30%", and the percentage of selection of the fifth line announcement effect pattern is "70%" (see FIG. 26).

Also, when the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 2 variation pattern "P21" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", when the scenario pattern 8 is selected, the fifth line The percentage of selection of the announcement effect pattern is "30%", and the percentage of selection of the sixth line announcement effect pattern is "70%" (see FIG. 26).

Also, when the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 2 variation pattern "P21" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", when the scenario pattern 6 is selected, the first line The percentage of selection of the announcement effect pattern is "75%", the percentage of selection of the second line announcement effect pattern is "10%", and the percentage of selection of the fourth line announcement effect pattern is It is "15%" (see FIG. 26).

Also, when the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 2 variation pattern "P21" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", when the scenario pattern 7 is selected, the fourth line The rate of selection of the forewarning effect pattern is "90%", and the rate of selection of the fifth line forewarning effect pattern is "10%" (see FIG. 26).

Also, when the information of the special figure variation pattern included in the variation start command is the special figure 2 variation pattern "P21" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", when the scenario pattern 8 is selected, the fifth line The percentage of selection of the announcement effect pattern is "90%", and the percentage of selection of the sixth line announcement effect pattern is "10%" (see FIG. 26).

26, in the first embodiment, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 does not display only the first effect character KY1 accompanying the second special icon TA2 (scenario pattern 6). ), when the first effect character KY1 is changed to the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3 accompanying the second special icon TA2 (scenario pattern 7, scenario pattern 8), the image display device The second dialogue image SG2 or the third dialogue image SG3 is likely to be displayed on the display screen 50a. On the other hand, it is better only when the first effect character KY1 is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 in association with the second special icon TA2 (scenario pattern 6). When the first effect character KY1 is replaced by the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3 (scenario pattern 7, scenario pattern 8), the first dialogue image SG1 is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. It is easier to display. Thus, when the first effect character KY1 displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is replaced by the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3, there is a high possibility of a big win. It is possible to expect that the dialogue image SG suggesting is displayed.

9. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 [Main Control Main Processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 44. FIG. Note that the counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 16 from the ROM 83 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU 82 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for interrupt time management) setting, various flags, status and counter resets. etc. Unless otherwise specified, basically, the initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting (S001) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. Further, in the present embodiment, a privilege giving counter, which will be described later, is set to "100" in the initial setting (S001).

After the initial setting (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), various random number counter values shown in FIG. 6 are updated by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The period initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generating circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal design/special design main random number update process (S003) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU 82, for example, at a 4 msec cycle. That is, it is executed, for example, at a 4 msec cycle. And, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, before the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, various counters by normal design / special design main random number update processing (S003) Value update processing is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] Next, the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in main-side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands set in the output buffer provided in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process (S101), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, first big winning sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 30a, the second big winning slot sensor 35a, the normal winning slot sensor 250a, etc. (see FIG. 4)) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as winning ball information. A detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data. It is assumed that the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of each prize opening is set to a predetermined value, such as two balls for the second start opening 21, for example. However, it is possible to appropriately change how many balls are set as the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning in each prize opening.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. ) until the start of the next main-side timer interrupt process (S005)).

Normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) followed by sensor detection process (S104), normal operation process (S105), special operation process (S106), distribution member control process (S107), and specific area A sensor detection process (S108) is executed. After that, other processing (S109) is executed, and the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) ends. As other processing (S109), the first special figure reservation display 43a is controlled to display the number based on the number of special figure 1 reservation balls, which will be described later. Then, the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 (see FIG. 27). A side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed. In the output processing (S101) of the main timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 in the previous main timer interrupt processing (S005) are output.

[Sensor detection process] As shown in FIG. 29, in the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. S201). If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S201), gate passage processing (S202), which will be described later, is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S201), the process passes through the gate passing process (S202) and proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a (S203). If the game ball has not won the second start port 21 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S209, but if the game ball has won the second start port 21 (YES in S203), the special figure 2 It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM 84) has reached "4" (S204). Then, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached "4" (YES in S204), the process is finished, but if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than "4" (NO in S204 ), and add "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S205).

Then special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S206) it does. In the special figure 2 random number acquisition process (S206), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A), the symbol type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS), the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and fluctuation Acquiring the pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (that is, acquiring the random value group shown in FIG. 6 (A)), and storing the acquired random values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b (FIG. 4) It is stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b according to the current number of special figure 2 reservation balls.

Subsequently, a second starting winning command specifying process (S207) is performed. In the second starting winning command specifying process (S207), the second starting winning command (an example of winning information) is specified using the starting winning command specifying table shown in FIG. 14 based on the random value group stored in step S206. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot random number is "65248" and the symbol type random number is "199", then the second starting position is referred to in the starting winning command specific table of FIG. A command "E2H03H" is specified as a winning command. A command consists of 2-byte information (1-byte upper command (eg, E2H) and 1-byte lower command (eg, 03H)). In the starting winning command of this embodiment, the value of the upper digit of the two-digit hexadecimal command is information specifying the type of the command (that it is the starting winning command). Also, the value of the lower digit in the higher order command is starting point information that designates the type of starting point (whether the first starting point 20 wins or the second starting point 21 wins). In addition, the low-order command of two digits in hexadecimal is lottery result information. It should be noted that the rules regarding such a start winning command are only examples, and can be arbitrarily changed.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the second starting winning command specified in step S207 to the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S208).

Subsequently, in the sensor detection process (S104), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a (S209). If the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (NO in S209), the process is finished, but if the game ball has won the first start port 20 (YES in S209), the special figure 1 is reserved. It is determined whether or not the number of balls (the number of first special figure reservations, specifically the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM 84) has reached "4" (S210). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls has reached "4" (YES in S210), the process ends, but if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is less than "4" (NO in S210 ), and add "1" to the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls (S211).

Then special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing (S212) it does. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S212), like the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S206), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A), the symbol type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS) , Obtain the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (that is, obtain the random value group shown in FIG. 6 (A)), and Stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservation balls among the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a (FIG. 4).

Subsequently, the first start winning command specifying process (S213) is performed. In the first starting winning command identification process (S213), the first starting winning command (an example of winning information) is identified using the starting winning command identification table shown in FIG. 14 based on the random value group stored in step S212. Specifically, if the jackpot random number is "65535" and the symbol type random number is "199", the first start winning command is referenced by referring to the first start opening in the starting winning command specific table of FIG. to specify the command "E1H01H". Lottery result information is included in the identified first start winning command.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the first start winning command specified in step S213 to the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S214), and finishes the process. In addition, in this embodiment, when the first starting winning command indicating that it is a special losing is output to the sub-control board 90, the game control microcomputer 81 suggests shifting to a time saving state as a look-ahead effect. An effect (for example, an effect of displaying on the display screen 50a a predetermined image suggesting transition to the time saving state) is executed.

[Gate Passing Process] As shown in FIG. 30, in the gate passing process (S202), first, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting for normal symbol fluctuation (S221). Normal symbol variation standby is a state in which the normal symbol variation display is not being executed nor the auxiliary game is being executed. If it is not in normal design fluctuation standby (NO in S221), this process is finished immediately, but if it is in normal design fluctuation standby (YES in S221), normal design random number acquisition processing (S222) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S222), the normal symbol random number counter value (label-TRND-H value, FIG. 6B) is acquired, and the acquired random number value is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM84.

[Normal Operation Process] After the sensor detection process (S104), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal operation process (S105) shown in FIG. In the normal operation process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the power tube 22 is in operation (S301). If the electronic chew is not in operation (NO in S301), then it is determined whether or not normal symbols are being stopped (from the start to the end of the normal symbol stop time) (S302). If the normal symbols are not being stopped and displayed (NO in S302), then it is determined whether or not the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (S303). If it is not during the variable display of normal symbols (NO in S303), then it is determined whether or not there is a normal symbol random number stored before the hit determination acquired in step S222 (S304). If there is no normal pattern random number stored (NO in S304), this process ends.

In step S304, if the normal symbol random number is stored (YES in S304), hit determination processing (S305) is performed. In the hit determination process (S305), if it is a non-time-saving state, it is determined whether or not it hits based on the normal symbol hit determination table for the non-time-saving state (see the non-time-saving state column of the table shown in FIG. 11 (A)) If it is in the time saving state, it is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the normal symbol winning determination table for the time saving state (see the column of the time saving state in the table shown in FIG. 11(A)). Then, a pattern determination process is performed to set normal pattern stop pattern data according to the result of the hit determination process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 84 (S306). That is, in the symbol determination process (S306), if it is "losing", data corresponding to "normal losing symbol" is set, and if "winning", data corresponding to "normal winning symbol" is set.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol variation time determination processing (S307). In normal design fluctuation time determination processing (S307), with reference to the normal design fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Choose a variation pattern. On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state, a normal design variation pattern in which the normal design variation time is 2 seconds is selected.

After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol variation pattern selected in step S307 (S310). Along with this, in order to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of normal symbol variation, a normal symbol variation start command is set.

If it is during the fluctuation display of the normal design in the above step S303 (YES in S303), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S311), and if it has not passed, the process is finished. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S311), the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped with the display result (normal winning symbol or normal losing symbol) according to the determination result of the normal symbol random number (S312). Then, a normal symbol variation stop command for informing the sub-control board 90 of normal symbol variation stop is set (S313), and a normal symbol stop time (500 ms in this embodiment, see FIG. 11(B)) is set. (S314) to finish this process.

In addition, if the stop display of the normal design in the above-described step S302 (YES in S302), subsequently, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the normal design set in step S314 has elapsed (S315), and has passed. If not, terminate the process. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S315), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern stop pattern data of the normal winning pattern is set (S316), and if it is not the data of the normal winning pattern (that is, if it is not a hit (NO in S316)), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is normal winning pattern data (that is, if it is winning (YES in S316)), the opening pattern of electric chew 22 is set (S317). Specifically, if it is in the non-time-saving state, the open pattern for the non-time-saving state (see electric-tube open TBL1 in FIG. 11(C)) is set as the open pattern of the electric tube 22 . On the other hand, if it is in the time saving state, the opening pattern for the time saving state (see electric chew opening TBL2 in FIG. 11(C)) is set as the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 . Then, according to the opening pattern set in step S317, the electric tube 22 is operated (S318).

Also, if the electric tube 22 is in operation in the above-described step S301 (YES in S301), then it is determined whether or not the operation time of the electric tube 22 has elapsed (S319). Finish processing. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S319), the operation of the electric chew 22 is ended (S320).

[Special Action Processing] After the normal action processing (S105), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special action processing (S106) shown in FIG. In the special operation process (S106), the processing regarding the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, and "special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” are assigned. Then, if the "special action status" is "1" (YES in S901), a special symbol standby process (S902) is performed, and if the "special action status" is "2" (NO in S901) , YES in S903), special symbol fluctuation process (S904) is performed, and if the "special action status" is "3" (NO in both S901 and S903, YES in S905), special symbol determination process (S906 ) is performed, and if the "special action status" is "4" (NO in S901, S903, S905, YES in S907), special electric accessary processing 1 (S908) is performed as a jackpot game, and " If the special action status is "5" (S901, S903, S905, S907 are all NO), a special electric accessory process 2 (S909) is performed as a small winning game. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special Symbol Standby Processing] As shown in FIG. 33, in the special symbol standby processing (S902), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0". is determined (S1001). Then, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (YES in S1001), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21, the second It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls) of the 1 start port 20 is "0" (S1007). And if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1007), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20, already It is determined whether or not the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is a standby screen (demonstration screen for waiting for customers) (S1013). NO), the standby screen setting process (S1014) is performed. In the standby screen setting process (S1014), after a predetermined standby time has elapsed, a customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby screen is set.

In step S1001, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1001), that is, the storage of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 (special figure 2 reservation information ) is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1002) and special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1003) to be described later are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by 1 (S1004). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the fourth reservation in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b (S1005). In this way, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1006). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1006), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM84, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process (S1006) includes the special figure stop design data set in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) Information and information of the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1003) (information including information on variation time) is included.

Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1001 and NO in S1007), that is, due to winning the second start port 21 Although there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired by the first start port 20, if there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 (reservation information of special figure 1), Toku-zu 1 jackpot determination processing (S1008) and Toku-zu 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1009) to be described later are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of special figure 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1010). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted by one to the side to be read from the current position, and the fourth reservation in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a (S1011). In this way, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1012). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1012), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1012) includes the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008). Information and information of the variation pattern set in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009) (information including information on variation time) is included.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols based on the first special figure reservation is performed only when there is no acquired special figure 2 relation random number (in the case of YES in S1001). That is, the special figure 2 lottery is executed with priority over the special figure 1 lottery.

[Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (special figure 1 jackpot determination process)] Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) and special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) have the same processing flow, so based on FIG. will be explained together. As shown in FIG. 34, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008), first, as the determination value, the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A value) is read (S1101 ). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002), the jackpot random number stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM 84 (more specifically, the storage area corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) Read the counter value. Also, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008), the jackpot random number counter value stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM 84 (more specifically, the storage area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) read out.

Next, a big hit determination table (FIG. 7A) is set (S1102), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the set big hit determination table (S1103). If the result of the jackpot determination (S1103) is "jackpot", the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1104), and the symbol type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS value) is read and shown in FIG. 7(B). A jackpot symbol type (jackpot type) is determined based on the jackpot symbol type determination table (S1105). After judging the jackpot pattern type (S1105), the special pattern stop pattern data corresponding to the jackpot pattern type (see FIG. 7(B)) is set in the special pattern type buffer provided in the RAM 84 (S1106) and the process is finished. .

On the other hand, if the result of big hit determination (S1103) is not "big hit", it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1107). If the result of the small hit determination (S1107) is "small hit", the small hit flag is turned ON (S1108), the symbol type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS value) is read, and FIG. ) determines the small hit design type (type of small hit) based on the small hit design type determination table shown in (S1109). After judging the small winning design type (S1109), the special figure stop design data (see FIG. 7 (C)) corresponding to the small winning design classification is set in the special figure classification buffer provided in the RAM 84 (S1110) and processed. finish. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not it is a small hit may be provided separately from the big hit random number.

Also, if it is not a big hit (NO at S1103) or a small hit (NO at S1107), it is "losing", so the symbol type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS value) is read out and shown in FIG. (S1111). After determining the type of lost pattern (S1111), it is determined whether or not the type of the lost pattern is a special loss (time saving loss) (S1112). If it is a losing symbol B or a losing symbol D that is a special losing (YES in S1112), after performing the processing of step S1113, the special symbol stop symbol data (see FIG. 7 (D)) corresponding to the losing symbol type is stored in the RAM 84 Set in the special figure type buffer provided in (S1114) processing ends.

In step S1113, along with acquiring the number of times of working hours corresponding to the game state and the type of losing design based on the losing pattern type determination table (FIG. 9), the acquired number of times of working hours is stored in a predetermined number of times of working hours storage area provided in RAM84. set. Specifically, when it is a non-time saving state and the type of the losing pattern is the losing pattern D, the losing pattern type determination table for the non-time saving state (Fig. 9 (A)) is referred to, and the time saving number of times "6 ” is set in the RAM 84. In addition, when it is in the time saving state and the type of the losing pattern is the losing pattern D, the losing pattern type determination table for the time saving state (FIG. 9B) is referred to, and the number of time saving times "100" is set in the RAM 84. do.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process)] Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1003) and Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009) have the same process flow A summary description will be given based on FIG. 34 . As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1003) or special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009), first, whether the gaming state is a non-time saving state (whether the time saving flag is OFF) Determine (S1301).

If it is in the time saving state (YES in S1301), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1302). If it is ON (YES in S1302), referring to the table for the jackpot in the time saving state (the part corresponding to the jackpot in the table shown in FIG. 13), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1 value) To select the Toku-zu variation pattern based on (S1303). As shown in FIG. 13, when the special figure variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined.

In the case of a big hit or a small hit, the special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with a fluctuation production, and when the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation production according to the special figure fluctuation pattern is executed. be. Specifically, for example, SP reach is executed in the fluctuation production based on the special figure fluctuation pattern P1, and battle reach is executed in the fluctuation production based on the special figure fluctuation pattern P31 (remarks column of the table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 reference). Here, SP reach (super reach) is a reach with a longer fluctuation time after reaching than normal reach, and the table is distributed so that the winning probability (high possibility of winning a jackpot) is higher than normal reach rate is set. In this form, super reach is performed progressively through normal reach.

Also, in step S1302, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1302), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1304). If it is ON (YES in S1304), referring to the table for the time saving state medium and small hit (the part corresponding to the small hit in the table shown in FIG. 13), the special figure fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value Select (S1305).

Also, in step S1304, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1304), it is determined whether or not the type of the losing symbol is one of the losing symbols B, C, and D (S1306). If it is one of "losing pattern B", "losing pattern C", and "losing pattern D" (YES in S1306), each of the tables for losing patterns B, C, and D during the time saving state (the table shown in FIG. 13) The part corresponding to the special figure) is referred to, and the special figure variation pattern is selected (S1307).

In addition, in step S1306, if the type of the losing pattern is neither of the losing patterns B, C, or D (NO in S1306), it is "losing pattern A", so the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC value) is a reach establishment random number value (S1308). As shown in FIG. 7(E), the reach establishment random number is "0" to "11" in the time saving state, and "0" to "27" in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is less likely to reach the normal loss than the non-time-saving state. This is in order to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by making it possible to select more short reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state. If the reach random number counter value is a reach establishment random value (YES in S1308), that is, in the case of reach loss, a table for reach loss during time saving state (corresponds to reach loss in the table shown in FIG. 13 part) to select a special figure variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1309).

On the other hand, if the reach random number counter value is not a reach establishment random value (NO in S1308), that is, in the case of a loss without reach, a table for loss without reach during the time saving state (out of the tables shown in FIG. Applicable part) to select a special figure variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1310).

Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1009) at the time of no reach loss, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of pending balls is working. That is, when the number of reserved balls in the special design is "3" or "4", the special pattern fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls in the special design is "0" to "2" is selected.

Also in step S1301, if it is determined that the gaming state is not a time saving state (NO in S1301), that is, if it is determined to be a non-time saving state, according to the special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving state shown in FIG. Select a special figure variation pattern (S1311).

In the selection of the special figure variation pattern in the non-time saving state, the processing is performed in the same flow as the time saving state except that the special figure variation pattern determination table to be referred to is a table (see FIG. 12) corresponding to each non-time saving state.

In addition, in the case of losing, based on the selected special figure fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation production pattern is determined by referring to each fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. The content of the performance is decided. Selection of the variable effect pattern in the case of losing is performed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . This point will be described in detail later.

After performing the selection of the special figure variation pattern as described above, set the selected special figure variation pattern (S1312), and finish this process. The information of the special figure variation pattern set in step S1312 is included in the variation start command set in step S1006 or S1012 in the special symbol standby process (S902).

[Special symbol fluctuation process] As shown in FIG. 36, in the special symbol fluctuation process (S904), first, the special symbol fluctuation time (variation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in step S1003 or S1009, FIG. 12 and FIG. 13) has elapsed (S1501). If it has not passed (NO in S1501), this process is terminated immediately. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1501), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1502), and the special action status is set to "3" (S1503). Subsequently, after performing the later-described gaming state management process (S1504), the variable display of the special symbols is set according to the set special symbol stop symbol data (see FIGS. 7(B) to (D)) ( After performing other processing such as stopping at a jackpot pattern, a small hit pattern, or a losing pattern (S1505), this process is finished.

[Game State Management Processing] As shown in FIG. 37, in the game state management processing (S1504), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1511). If it is ON, it is determined whether or not the special symbol to stop the variation is related to the special figure 2 (S1512). If it is not a special figure 2 stop, the process proceeds to step S1516, but if it is a special figure 2 stop, the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (S1513), Whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S1514). The time saving counter is a counter that is set to a value corresponding to the number of time saving times of the time saving state to be started at the start of the time saving state, and is subtracted according to the variable display of the special figure 2 during the time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1516, but if the value of the time saving counter is "0" (YES in S1514), turn off the time saving flag to end the time saving state (S1515) , the process proceeds to step S1516.

In step S1516, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the time reduction provision counter by one. The time reduction provision counter is a counter that is set to a value corresponding to the number of time reduction provision times (600 times) when a jackpot game is performed, and is subtracted in accordance with the variable display of special symbols. Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is OFF (S1517). If the time saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S1522, but if the time saving flag is OFF, subsequently, it is determined whether or not the type of the losing pattern is a special loss (time saving loss) (S1518). If the type of the lost pattern is a special lost pattern B or a lost pattern D (YES in S1518), the time saving flag is turned ON (S1520). Thereby, determination (time saving determination) whether to control to a time saving state is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is set in response to the stop display of the special loss (the losing patterns B and D) in the non-time saving state. In addition, a predetermined number of times of time saving corresponding to the special losing pattern is set in the time saving counter (S1521), and the process proceeds to step S1522. The time saving frequency set here is the time saving frequency stored in the time saving frequency storage area of the RAM 84 in step S1113 of the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1008). Therefore, the number of time saving times set in this process is not the game state (time saving state, non-time saving state) at the time the process is performed, but the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process ( S1008) corresponds to the gaming state at the time when S1008) is performed. And, by executing steps S1520 and S1521, the game state is controlled to the time saving state. The time saving state is terminated by establishment of any end condition, that is, the special figure variation of a predetermined upper limit execution number (time saving number of times) is performed, or the next jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the type of losing pattern is not a special losing pattern (NO in S1518), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving provision counter is "0" (S1519). If the value of the time saving grant counter is not "0" (NO in S1519), proceed to step S1522, but if the value of the time saving grant counter is "0" (YES in S1519), turn on the time saving flag ( S1520), set the number of times of reduction of working hours according to the reduction of working hours setting table for reaching the number of times of reduction of working hours (FIG. 10) (S1521), and proceed to step S1522. That is, in this embodiment, in response to the count value of the non-specific fluctuation frequency after the jackpot game reaching 600, the number of times of time saving is controlled to one time saving state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the time saving state may be controlled even when the game is lost. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, to be controlled to the time-saving state according to the loss is limited to when it is a non-time-saving state (when YES in step S1517).

In step S1522, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state flag update processing. In the game state flag update process, the value of the game state flag is set to a value corresponding to the current game state. As shown in the table in FIG. 37, the value of the game state flag is set to "1" if it is a non-time saving state, and is set to "2" if it is a time saving state. Whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state can be determined based on ON and OFF of a time saving flag. That is, if the time saving flag is OFF, the value of the game state flag is set to "1" because it is in a non-time saving state. On the other hand, if the time saving flag is ON, the value of the game state flag is set to "2" because it is in the time saving state. In addition, in the game state flag update process (S1522), the game state designation command including the information of the updated game state flag (that is, the information of the current game state) is set in the output buffer of the RAM84. By outputting this command, the sub-control board 90 is notified of the current game state information. Then, the sub-control board 90 controls the effect mode according to the current game state.

In this form, in the gaming state management process (S1504), the control from the time saving state to the non-time saving state based on the number of special figure fluctuations reaching the upper limit of the number of time saving is performed. The control from the time saving state to the non-working time saving state based on the fact that the number of times of this special figure fluctuation has reached the upper limit of the number of times of working hours is made in the last special figure fluctuation in the time saving state. That is, in the final symbol variation in the time saving state, when the special symbol variation is completed and the special symbol is stopped, the state is shifted to the non-time saving state. Furthermore, in the game state management process (S1504), control to the time saving state based on the special loss is performed. The time saving state based on the special loss is set when the time saving flag is OFF, but is not set when the time saving flag is ON. In other words, when it is already in the time saving state, it is designed not to be controlled to the time saving state based on the special loss. However, in this form, before the time-saving determination to determine whether to control to the time-saving state based on the special loss, the number of times of special figure fluctuations has reached the upper limit of the number of time-savings. This is a configuration in which state control is performed. Therefore, in the last pattern variation among the pattern variations started in the time saving state, the game state is set to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is OFF) before the time saving determination. Therefore, in the last symbol variation in the time saving state, the time saving determination is performed in the non-time saving state, so it may be controlled to the time saving state based on the special loss.

[Special Symbol Confirmation Process] As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol confirmation process (S906), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time (see FIGS. 12 and 13) has elapsed (S1601). If it has not passed (NO in S1601), this process is terminated immediately. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1601), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1603). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1603), the special action status is set to "4" (S1604). Then, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1605), and if it is not ON, it proceeds to step S1607, but if it is ON, it turns off the time saving flag (S1606) and proceeds to step S1607. . Thereby, it is controlled to the non-time-saving state (low base state) during execution of the jackpot game. It should be noted that the low base state in this embodiment is a low base state in the sense that there is no prize winning support due to frequent opening of the electric tube 22, and it does not consider the base increase based on the operation of the big prize winning device. do not have.

Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command (see FIG. 8) is set (S1607), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1608). Following step S1608, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 8 for details) according to the type of the winning jackpot symbol (S1609). At this time, the value of a large winning opening opening counter that counts the number of times the large winning opening is opened during the special game is set to a value corresponding to the type of the winning jackpot symbol. Note that the setting of the release pattern (the set of data corresponding to the release pattern) may be performed for each round.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON in step S1603 (NO in S1603), then it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1611). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1611), the special operation status is set to "5" (S1612). Moreover, when the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1613), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1614). After that, in order to start the small winning game, the small winning opening command (see FIG. 8) is set (S1615), and the opening of the small winning game is started (S1616).

Following step S1616, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 8 for details) according to the type of the winning small winning symbol (S1617). At this time, the value of the big winning opening counter is set to a value corresponding to the type of the winning small winning symbol. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the distribution member operation flag (S1618), and ends this process. The distribution member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period for operating the distribution member 71 . That is, in this form, the operation of the distribution member 71 is started with the opening of the small winning game. In addition, the operation pattern of the distribution member will be described in detail later.

If the small hit flag is not ON in step S1611 (NO in S1611), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, so the special operation status is set to "1" (S1619), and the process ends.

[Special Electric Accessory Process 1 (Jackpot Game)] The special electric accessary process 1 is a process for executing a jackpot game such as a type 1 jackpot game or a type 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special electric accessary product process 1 (S908), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2001). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the first big prize winning device 31 has been completely opened in the jackpot game in which the player has won.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the first big winning port 30 is open (that is, whether or not the first big winning device 31 is open) (S2002). If it is not open (NO in S2002), whether it is time to open the first big prize winning opening 30, that is, at the time to start opening the first big winning opening 30 after the opening time of the jackpot has passed. It is determined whether or not the opening interval time has passed and the time to start the next opening has arrived (S2003).

If the determination result in step S2003 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2003 is YES, the first big winning hole 30 is opened according to the set opening pattern (S2004).

If the first big winning hole 30 is open in step S2002 (YES in S2002), the number of winning prizes to the first big winning hole 30 in the unit opening game reaches the specified maximum winning number (10 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not it has reached (S2005). If the prescribed number of prizes has not been reached (NO in S2005), it is determined whether or not the time has come to close the first large prize winning port 30 (that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the first large prize winning port 30 (see FIG. 8). ) has elapsed) is determined (S2006). Then, if the opening time of the first big winning hole 30 has not passed (NO in S2006), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the specified winning number has been reached (YES in S2005) or if the opening time of the first big winning port 30 has passed (YES in S2006), one of the two opening end conditions is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the first big prize winning opening 30 is closed (blocked) (S2007). Then, the value of the large winning opening open counter is decremented by 1 (S2008), and it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening open counter is "0" (S2009). If it is not "0" (NO in S2009), the process ends as it is to start the next release.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2009), the jackpot ending command (see FIG. 8) is set to end the jackpot game (S2010), and the jackpot ending is started (S2011). Then, the jackpot end flag is set and the process ends (S2012).

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2001 (YES in S2001), it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed since the opening of the first jackpot winning port 30 in the jackpot game has all been completed. (S2013), and if the ending time has not passed (NO in S2013), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2013), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2014), and the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2015). Then, the special action status is set to "1" (S2016), the value corresponding to the number of times of time reduction grant counter is set (600 times), and the game state setting process (S2018) described later is performed. Finish processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the count value of the non-specific fluctuation frequency counted by the time saving provision counter is reset according to the execution of the jackpot game.

[Game state setting process] As shown in FIG. 40, in the game state setting process (S2018), first, the winning design (big winning design or small winning design) that triggered the execution of this big winning game is controlled to the time saving state. It is determined whether or not it is a trigger pattern (see FIG. 8) (S2101). If the determination result is NO, the process proceeds to step S2104, but if the determination result is YES, the time saving flag is turned ON (S2102), and the time saving number of times according to the type of winning pattern (see FIG. 8) is set to the time saving counter. set (S2103) and proceed to step S2105. By executing steps S2102 and S2103, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a time saving state (high base state). The time saving state is terminated by establishment of either end condition that the special figure variation of the predetermined upper limit execution number (time saving number of times) is performed, or the next jackpot game is executed. In this process, the time saving state is set by executing steps S2102 and S2103.

In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state flag update process. In the game state flag update process (S2105), the value of the game state flag is set to a value corresponding to the current game state. Specifically, in this game state flag update process (S2105), if the time saving flag is OFF, it is a non-time saving state, so the value of the game state flag is set to "1", and if the time saving flag is ON Since it is a time saving state, the value of the game state flag is set to "2" (refer to the table in FIG. 26). In addition, in the game state flag update process (S2105), the game state designation command including the updated game state flag information (that is, the current game state information) is set in the output buffer of the RAM84. By outputting this command, the sub-control board 90 is notified of the current game state information. Then, the sub-control board 90 controls the effect mode according to the current game state.

[Special Electric Accessory Process 2 (Small Win Game)] The special electric accessary process 2 is a process for executing a small win game that opens the second big winning device 36 having the specific area 39 . As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, in the special electric auditors processing 2 (S909), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning device 36 has ended in the small winning game.

If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the second big winning port 35 is open (that is, whether or not the second big winning device 36 is open) (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not the time to open the second big winning hole 35 has come, that is, the time of the predetermined interval before opening (opening of the small win) has passed and the second big winning hole It is determined whether or not it is time to start opening 35 (S2303).

If the determination result in step S2303 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2303 is YES, the second big winning hole 35 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the type of the winning small winning symbol (S2304).

In step S2302, if the second large prize winning port 35 is open (YES in S2302), whether or not the number of prizes into the second large prize winning port 35 has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (10 in this embodiment) is determined (S2305). If the number of winning prizes has not reached the prescribed number (NO in S2305), it is determined whether or not the time has come to close the second large prize winning port 35 (that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the second large prize winning port 35 (see FIG. 8). As shown, it is determined whether or not 1.6 seconds have elapsed in this embodiment (S2306). Then, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 has not passed (NO in S2306), this processing is finished.

On the other hand, if the specified winning number has been reached (YES in S2305) or if the opening time of the second big winning port 35 has passed (YES in S2306), one of the two opening end conditions is met. If it is satisfied, the second big winning opening 35 is closed (blocked) (S2307). Then, the value of the big winning opening open counter is decremented by 1 (S2308), the small winning end flag is set (S2309), and this processing is finished.

Also, if the small hit end flag is ON in step S2301 (YES in S2301), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has passed (S2310), and if the post-closure interval time has not passed (NO in S2310), the process ends. In addition, the time of the interval after the closing of the small winning game will be described later. On the other hand, if the time of the interval after closing has passed (YES in S2310), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2311), the small hit flag is turned OFF (S2312), and the process proceeds to step S2313.

In step S2313, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON. The V flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 during execution of the small winning game, and is a flag that is turned ON at step S2603 (see FIG. 33) to be described later. If this V flag is not ON (NO in S2313), the two-type jackpot game is not executed, so the value of the big winning opening counter is cleared to "0" (S2314), and the special operation status is set to "1". Set (S2315) to end the process.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON (YES in S2313), the game control microcomputer 81 turns OFF the V flag (S2317) and turns ON the jackpot flag (S2318) in order to execute the two-type jackpot game. , the special operation status is set to "4" (S2319). Subsequently, if the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2320), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2321). Then, the jackpot opening command (see FIG. 8) is set (S2322), and the jackpot opening is started (S2323). As a result, the small winning game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a short period of time is shifted to the second big winning game.

[Distribution member control processing] The game control microcomputer 81 performs the distribution member control processing (S107) following the special action processing (S106) (see FIG. 17). In the distribution member control process (S107), as shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not the distribution member operation flag is ON (S2501). If the distribution member operation flag is not ON, this process is finished. On the other hand, if the distribution member operation flag is ON, since the opening of the small winning game has started (see FIG. 38), the distribution member operation processing ( S2502) is performed, and V effective period setting processing (S2503) is performed.

In the distribution member operation processing (S2502), a timer for measuring the operation time of the distribution member 71 is set, and based on the time measurement using the timer, the distribution member is activated when the distribution member 71 is opened. The solenoid 73 is turned on, and when the closing timing of the distribution member 71 comes, the distribution member solenoid 73 is turned off. As a result, the distribution member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small winning game.

[Specific area sensor detection process] After the distribution member control process (S107), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S108) (see Fig. 28). In the specific area sensor detection process (S108), as shown in FIG. 44, first, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2601). If there is no detection (NO at S2601), the process is terminated. If there is detection (YES at S2601), it is determined whether or not it is within the V valid period (S2602). The V valid period is a period set in the V valid period setting process (S2503) in the above-described distribution member control process (FIG. 32).

If it is determined in step S2602 that the V valid period is in effect (YES in S2602), the V flag is turned ON (S2603), the V passage command is set (S2604), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2602), the specific area sensor detection process ends without performing the processes in steps S2603 and S2604. The V-passage command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to notify of V-passage (passage of the specific region 39).

10. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 53. FIG. Note that a counter, a timer, a flag, a buffer, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing] When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 45 from the ROM 93 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, power-on processing is performed in response to power-on (S4001). In the power-on processing, for example, settings of the CPU 92, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for determining various effects are updated. As an example of a method for updating the effect determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above.

When the random number update process ends, command transmission process is executed (S4004). In command transmission processing (S4004), various commands stored in the output buffer in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100. FIG. The image control board 100 that has received the command displays an image on the display screen 50a (display unit) according to the received command (performs various effects using the image). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 100, the sub-control board 90 outputs sound from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 (executes various sound effects using sound), and controls the lamp. The board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are caused to emit light via the substrate 107 (executing various light emission effects by light emission), and the board movable body 15 is operated (executing various movable body effects by movement). do. In this way, various productions (variation production, suspension production, movable body production, operation production, pre-reading production, other advance notice production, opening production accompanying special game, open game production, ending production, customer waiting production, production mode control, etc.) is realized.

The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time various commands sent from the main control board 80 are input to the effect control microcomputer 91. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 91 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output processing (S101) of the main control board 80 in the reception buffer of the RAM94. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 1 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. In the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 46, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable body control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input process, an operation of an operation unit such as the effect button detection switch 63a or the select button detection switch 64a that the player can operate is detected, and a command is set or data for effect is created according to the detection result. In the light emission data output process, the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 are caused to emit light at the timing suitable for the image effect, etc., based on the effect data created in the input process, the effect data creation process, etc., which will be described later. Therefore, the light emission data (lamp data) is output to the lamp control board 107 . That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, and the like to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable body control process, based on the performance data created in the input process, the performance data creation process, etc., which will be described later, the movable bodies such as the board movable body 15 are driven at a predetermined timing to perform a movable body performance. Output data. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the movable body effect by operating the board movable body 15 and the like in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. The watchdog timer process resets the watchdog timer.

[10 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. In the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012), as shown in FIG. 47, after performing received command analysis processing (S4201), which will be described later, production timer update processing (S4202), voice control processing (S4203), production data creation processing (S4204) is performed sequentially.

In the production timer update process, a timer for measuring the time for each production is updated. For example, in the effect timer update process, the start timing and end timing of the operation valid period of the operation unit such as the effect button 63 and the select button 64 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data for controlling audio output from the speaker 67) is created and output to the audio control board 106 based on the processing results of the input process and received command analysis process. In the effect data creation process, the effect data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process.

[Received Command Analysis Processing] In the received command analysis processing (S4201), first, as shown in FIG. Winning command) is received (S4401), and if received, the process proceeds to start winning processing (S4402), which will be described later. Proceeding to processing (S4404), further proceeding to production character accompanying suggestion production processing (S4405), further proceeding to production character accompanying production processing (S4406).

[Start Winning Process] In the starting winning process (S4401), the effect control microcomputer 91 first stores the start winning command reserve storage section of the RAM94. Specifically, if the received command is the first start prize winning command, it is stored in the first start prize winning command reserve storage unit, and if the received command is the second start prize winning command, the second start prize winning command reserve storage unit is stored. memorize to Note that the starting winning command is stored in the lowest numbered storage area in which the command is not stored among the first to fourth storage areas in each starting winning command reserve storage section. Thereby, the start winning command is stored in the order corresponding to the storage order of the special figure reservation.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91, if the stored starting winning command is the first starting winning command, updates the value of the first special figure pending production counter provided in the RAM94 by adding "1", If it is a 2 start winning a prize command, the value of the second special figure reservation performance counter provided in the RAM 94 is updated by adding "1". In addition, the first special figure reservation effect counter is a counter on the effect control side (sub control board 90 side) for calculating the number of first special figure reservations. Similarly, the 2nd special figure reservation production counter is the counter of the production control side which calculates the number of the 2nd special figure reservation.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs pre-reading including whether or not a big hit is won, based on the start winning command stored in step S4502. In the look-ahead, the length of the fluctuation time and the presence or absence of the reach are determined in addition to the success or failure of the big hit.

Subsequently, if the currently set effect mode is the normal effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the result of the prefetch based on the start winning command and the scenario pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select the scenario pattern of the icon (suspended icon, relevant icon).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91, when the normal effect mode is being set, in the change opportunity effect selection process (S4403), the scenario pattern selected in step S4502, the information included in the start winning command and , and a change opportunity presentation selection table (see FIG. 21) to select whether or not to execute the change opportunity presentation. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a change opportunity production start command in the change opportunity production selection process (S4403), when execution of the change opportunity production is selected, and ends this process as it is. During the setting of the normal production mode of the first embodiment, after the change opportunity production start command is set by the production control microcomputer 91, a specific timing (for example, the hold provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 When the pending icon displayed in the icon display area 50d is shifted (see FIGS. 62(B) and 63(B)), the change opportunity effect is executed, and the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 For example, a change trigger image MY is displayed (see FIGS. 62(B) and 63(B)). Incidentally, when the production control microcomputer 91 does not normally set the production mode, it ends the change opportunity production selection process (S4403) and proceeds to step S4404.

Subsequently, when the normal effect mode is being set, the effect control microcomputer 91, in the icon change effect process (S4404), the scenario pattern selected in step S4502, the information included in the start winning command, Whether or not to execute the icon change effect is selected based on the information as to whether or not the change opportunity effect has been executed. Subsequently, in the icon change effect processing (S4404), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an icon change effect start command when execution of the icon change effect (suspended change effect, the change effect) is selected, This process is terminated as it is. During the setting of the normal production mode of the first embodiment, after the icon change production start command is set by the production control microcomputer 91, simultaneously with the end of the execution of the change opportunity production (Fig. 64 (A), Fig. 65 (A) , FIG. 66(A) and FIG. 67(A)), an icon change effect (suspended change effect, the change effect) is executed, and an icon whose display mode is changed is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. (Pending icon, relevant icon) is displayed (see FIGS. 64(A), 65(A), 66(A), and 67(A)). Incidentally, when the effect control microcomputer 91 does not set the normal effect mode, it ends the icon change effect processing (S4404) and proceeds to step S4405.

Subsequently, when the normal effect mode is being set, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the effect character accompanying suggestive effect process (S4405). and the effect character accompanying suggestive effect selection table (see FIG. 22), whether or not to execute the effect character accompanying suggestive effect is selected. If execution of the effect character accompanying suggestive effect is selected in the effect character accompanying suggestive effect (S4405), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the effect character accompanying suggestive effect start command, and ends this processing as it is. After the effect character-associated suggestive effect start command is set, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the icon changed to the second special icon (second special hold icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2), Alternatively, when the suspended icon displayed in the suspended icon display area 50d provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is shifted (see FIGS. 66(B) and 67(B)), the effect character accompanying A suggestion effect is executed, and for example, the first effect character KY1 is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (see FIGS. 66B and 67B). If the normal effect mode is not being set, the effect control microcomputer 91 ends the effect character accompanying suggestion effect process (S4405) and proceeds to step S4406.

Subsequently, in the effect character accompanying effect processing (S4406), the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the scenario pattern selected in step S4502, the information included in the start winning command, and the effect character accompanying effect selection table (see FIG. 23). Based on, it is selected whether or not to execute the production character accompanying production. If execution of the effect character accompanying effect is selected in the effect character accompanying effect (S4406), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the effect character accompanying effect start command, and ends this processing. After the production character-accompanied production start command is set, at the end of execution of the production character-accompanied suggestive production (see FIG. 66 (C-2) and FIG. 67 (C-2)), the production character-accompanied production is executed, and the image The first effect character KY1 is displayed in the pending icon display area 50d or the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the display device 50 (Fig. 66 (C-2), Fig. 67 (C-2). reference). If the normal effect mode is not being set, the effect control microcomputer 91 ends the effect character accompanying effect process (S4406) and proceeds to step S4406.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4407), and if received, performs a variation effect start process (S4408) which will be described later.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4409), and if received, the fluctuation production end processing (S4410) to be described later is performed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the game state designation command is received from the main control board 80 (S4411), and if received, the effect mode designation process (S4412) described later is performed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (S4413), and if received, performs an opening effect selection process (S4414). In the opening effect selection process (S4414), the opening command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening performance start command for starting the opening performance with the selected opening performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (S4415), and if received, performs an ending effect selection process (S4416). In the ending effect selection process (S4416), the ending command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM94. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a value corresponding to the number of times of time reduction provision (600 times) to the sub time reduction provision counter in step S4416. Therefore, after the jackpot game, when the non-specific fluctuation frequency reaches the time reduction provision frequency, it is possible to control to the time reduction state.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the V passing command is received from the main control board 80 (S4417), and if received, performs the V passing notification effect start process (S4418). In the V passage notification effect start process (S4418), a V passage notification effect start command for starting the V passage notification effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM94. The V passage notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the V passage (passing through the specific area 39). In this embodiment, a predetermined V passage notification image (for example, a character image representing the character "V") is displayed on the display screen 50a. The display of the character image of "V" as the V passage notification effect is used as a transition notification to the high probability state in the pachinko game machine 1 that performs control to the high probability state based on the passage to the specific area 39. It has meaning. Note that the V-passing notification effect may be performed in other forms, such as outputting a special sound effect from the speaker 67 .

Subsequently, as other processing (S4419), processing based on received commands other than the above commands (for example, setting the value of the game state status indicating the current game state based on the game state designation command to grasp the game state processing, etc.) to end the received command analysis processing.

[Variation Production Start Processing] In the variation production start processing (S4408), first, as shown in FIG. 49, the production control microcomputer 91 analyzes the fluctuation start command (S5001). The variation start command includes information on the special figure variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (steps S1003 and S1009 in FIG. 33). The information of the special figure variation pattern includes the symbol information designating the symbol as the determination result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (see FIG. 7). In addition, the pattern information etc. which the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control acquired here can be suitably utilized also in the process performed after this.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91, if the fluctuation start command analyzed in S5001 is a special figure 1 fluctuation start command, subtracts "1" from the value of the first special figure reservation production counter, and special figure 2 fluctuation start command If so, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second special figure reservation effect counter (S5002). Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 shifts the data stored in the start winning command reserve storage unit (first start win prize command reserve storage unit, second start win prize command reserve storage unit) (S5003). Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 shifts the suspension icons (normal suspension icon HA, first special suspension icon HA1, second special suspension icon HA2) (S5004).

Next, production mode switching processing (S5005) and fluctuation production pattern selection processing (S5006), which will be described later, are performed, and the production design to be finally stopped and displayed in production design fluctuation production is selected (S5007). Specifically, the selection of the performance pattern is performed by acquiring a random number for determining the performance pattern, and selecting a plurality of tables classified according to the type of special symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the special symbol lottery and the presence or absence of reach. One table is selected from among them based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command, and the selected table is used to determine the obtained random number for determining the performance design, thereby selecting the performance design. As a result, a combination (for example, "2, 2, 2", etc.) of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be finally stopped and displayed is determined.

After step S5007, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently performs effect character change suggesting effect processing (S5008), then effect character change effect processing (S5009), and then dialogue announcement effect selection processing (S5010). Then, the mode suggestion effect selection process (S5011) described later is performed, and the mode entry confirmation effect selection process (S5012) is performed.

[Production Character Change Suggestion Effect Selection Process] In the production character change suggestion effect selection process (S5008), the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the current variable effect to be executed in the normal effect mode when the normal effect mode is set. If the icon to be displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is the second special icon TA2, the scenario pattern selected in step S4502 and Based on the special figure variation pattern information included in the variation start command analyzed in 1 and the effect character change suggestion effect selection table (see FIG. 24), it is selected whether or not to execute the effect character change suggestion effect. Subsequently, in the performance character change suggesting effect selection process (S5008), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the effect character change suggesting effect start command when execution of the effect character change suggesting effect is selected, and this processing is performed as it is. exit. After the effect character change suggesting effect start command is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal effect mode of the first embodiment, the execution timing of the effect character change suggesting effect (for example, a predetermined time after the variable effect is executed) (For example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) (see FIG. 69A), the effect character change suggesting effect is executed, and the third effect character KY3, for example, is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (see FIG. 69A). See FIG. 69(A)).

[Production character change effect selection process] In the production character change effect selection process (S5009), the effect control microcomputer 91, when the normal effect mode is set, performs this variable effect in the normal effect mode. When the icon to be displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is the second special icon TA2, the scenario pattern selected in step S4502 and the analysis in step S5001 are performed. Based on the special figure variation pattern information included in the received variation start command and the effect character change effect selection table (see FIG. 25), it is selected whether or not to execute the effect character change effect. Subsequently, in the effect character change effect selection process (S5009), when the effect character change effect execution is selected, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the effect character change effect start command, and ends this process as it is. . ( (See FIG. 69(B-2)), the effect character change effect is executed, and the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 shows, for example, the first effect character KY1 indicating that the possibility of winning a big win is very high. 3 It is replaced by the production character KY3 (see FIG. 69(C)).

[Dialogue announcement effect selection process] In the dialogue announcement effect selection process (S5010), if the normal effect mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the image in the current variable effect executed in the normal effect mode. When the icon to be displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the device 50 is the second special icon TA2, the scenario pattern selected in step S4502 is scenario pattern 5. 6, scenario pattern 7 or scenario pattern 8, when it is one of the scenario patterns, the information of the special figure fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S5001, and the dialogue notice effect pattern selection table (Fig. 26), a speech announcement effect pattern is selected, a speech announcement effect start command is set, and this processing ends as it is. After the speech announcement effect start command is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal effect mode of the first embodiment, the execution timing of the dialogue notice effect (for example, at the start of the variable effect, when the reach is established, the effect character After a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the alternation effect is completed (see FIGS. 68 and 70), the dialogue announcement effect is executed, and the result of the jackpot determination is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. Words images SG (first words image SG1, second words image SG2, third words image SG3) suggesting the possibility of a big win are displayed (see FIGS. 68 and 70).

[Mode entry confirmed effect selection process] In the mode entry confirmed effect selection process (S5012), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the value of the sub time reduction grant counter is "0" during normal effect mode setting, and changes. The information of the special figure variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (steps S1003, S1009 in FIG. 33) included in the start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", the special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", the special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", or special figure 2 variation pattern "P23", if the information is any special figure variation pattern, the mode entry confirmation production start command set. After the mode entry confirmation production start command is set by the production control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal production mode of the first embodiment, simultaneously with the end of execution of the mode entry suggestion production, that is, the mode entry suggestion image ZS and the third Simultaneously with the end of the display of the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK3 (see FIG. 71), the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is caused to display the mode entry confirmation image ZT that notifies the shift to the time saving effect mode (see FIG. 71). 74(C), FIG. 74(D), FIG. 74(E)).

[Production Mode Switching Process] In the production mode switching process (S5005), first, as shown in FIG. 50, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal production mode transition flag is ON (S5013). The normal production mode shift flag is a flag that is turned ON when it is determined that the normal production mode, which is one of the production modes, is shifted from another production mode. If the normal production mode transition flag is OFF (NO at S5013), the process proceeds to step S5017, but if it is ON (YES at S5013), it is determined whether or not the start of the variable display relates to the special figure 1. (S5014). If it is not the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (NO in S5014), proceed to step S5017, but if it is the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (YES in S5014), perform processing to set normal production mode (S5015), normal After turning OFF the production mode transition flag (S5016), the process proceeds to step S5017. As a result, the production mode is controlled to the normal production mode. The normal production mode is a production mode that is mainly set in a non-time saving state. Further, the control from another production mode to the normal production mode is performed according to the start of the symbol variation related to the special figure 1.

In step S5017, it is determined whether or not the time saving production mode transition flag is ON. The time reduction production mode transition flag is a flag that is turned ON when it is determined that the other production mode is shifted to the time reduction production mode, which is one of the production modes. If the time saving production mode transition flag is OFF (NO in S5017), this processing is finished, but if it is ON (YES in S5017), the processing for setting the time saving production mode is performed (S5018). As a result, the production mode is controlled to the time saving production mode. The time saving production mode is a production mode mainly set in the time saving state. Subsequently, the time saving production mode transition flag is turned OFF (S5019), and the production mode switching process is finished.

[Variable effect pattern selection process] In the variable effect pattern selection process (S5006), first, as shown in Fig. 51, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the game is a big hit based on the symbol information (S5021). If it is a jackpot (YES in S5021), based on the information of the special figure fluctuation pattern, select the production pattern (sub-variation pattern) of the fluctuation production related to the jackpot (S5022). As a result, details of the contents of the variation effect relating to the big win are determined. For example, if the special figure variation pattern is SP reach, select a sub-variation pattern to perform SP reach. Furthermore, when a plurality of effects belonging to the SP reach are provided, even details including which effect belonging to the SP reach is to be executed are determined.

If it is not a big hit (NO in S5021), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit based on the symbol information (S5023). If it is a small hit (YES in S5023), based on the information of the special figure fluctuation pattern, select the production pattern (sub-variation pattern) of the fluctuation production related to the small hit (S5024). In addition, the details of the variation performance relating to the small win are determined by selecting the performance pattern of the variation performance.

If it is not a big hit (NO at S5021) or a small hit (NO at S5023), it is "losing", so a variable production pattern related to losing is selected from the fluctuation production pattern determination table (Fig. 15) (S5025 to S5029) ). In the case of "losing", the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the variable effect pattern from the variable effect pattern determination table (FIG. 15). Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub time saving counter is greater than "1" (S5025). If the value of the sub time-saving counter is greater than "1" (YES in S5025), based on the pattern information of the lost pattern, the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for the time-saving state with a remaining number of times of 2 or more (Fig. 15 (B)) to select a variable effect pattern (S5026). Moreover, when the value of the sub time-saving counter is "1" or less (NO in S5025), it is determined whether the value of the sub time-saving counter is "1" (S5027). If the value of the sub time-saving counter is "1" (YES in S5027), based on the pattern information of the lost pattern, refer to the variable effect pattern determination table for the time-saving state with the remaining number of times of time-saving 1 (Fig. 15 (C)) and select a variable production pattern (S5028). In addition, when it is determined that the value of the sub time-saving counter is less than "1" (NO in S5027), based on the pattern information of the lost pattern, the variable effect pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (Fig. 15 ( A))) is referred to, and a variable production pattern is selected (S5029).

Here, the sub time-saving counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times of the time-saving state to be started in response to the time-saving state being started, and the variable display of the special figure 2 during the time-saving state is performed. A counter that is decremented accordingly. Setting and subtraction of the sub time-saving counter is performed in the fluctuation effect end processing (S4410) described later. Thereby, the value of the sub time-saving counter at the start of the symbol variation is "1" or more in the time-saving state, and is less than "1", ie, "0", in the non-time-saving state. And, in this form, as described above, in the non-time saving state, while it may be controlled to the time saving state based on the special loss (time saving loss), when it is already in the time saving state, the time saving state based on the special loss It is not controlled to Therefore, when the value of the sub time-saving counter is less than "1", the variable performance pattern is determined using the variable performance pattern determination table in which the time-saving entry performance with the contents suggesting the transition to the time-saving state can be selected after that. selected.

Further, as described above, in the last symbol variation in the time saving state, it is possible to control to the time saving state based on the special loss. Therefore, even when the value of the sub time-saving counter is "1", the variable performance pattern is selected using the variable performance pattern determination table in which the time-saving rush performance can be selected. On the other hand, if the value of the sub time-saving counter is greater than "1", it is not controlled to the time-saving state based on the special failure, so the variable performance pattern determination table in which the time-saving rush performance is not selected is used. , the variable effect pattern is selected. The details of the variable effect related to the loss are determined by selecting the variable effect pattern.

Thus, the production control microcomputer 91 can appropriately determine whether the game state is the time saving state or the non-time saving state based on the sub time saving counter. Furthermore, when it is in the time saving state, it is also possible to appropriately determine whether or not it is the last symbol variation in the time saving state. And even if the information of the special figure fluctuation pattern is the same, it is possible to select different fluctuation performance patterns depending on the game state and the value of the sub time saving counter. As a result, for example, it is possible to execute an effect capable of appropriately suggesting a game state to which there is a possibility of transition thereafter. Furthermore, for example, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect suggesting a game state that has no possibility of transitioning thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game through the presentation.

After selecting a variable performance pattern (S5021 to S5029), a variable performance start command for starting a variable performance with the selected performance pattern and variable performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 (S5030). When the variable effect start command set in step S5030 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined effect image from the image ROM 103, A variable presentation is performed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG.

[Mode Suggestion Effect Selection Process] In the mode suggestion effect selection process (S5011), first, as shown in FIG. is "2" (S5042). When the value of the sub time-saving provision counter is "2" (YES in S5042), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the first mode suggestion effect start command (S5043), and ends this process as it is.

Also, if the value of the sub time saving grant counter is not "2" (NO in S5042), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the sub time saving grant counter is "1" ( S5044). When the value of the sub time-saving provision counter is "1" (YES in S5044), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the second mode suggestion effect start command (S5045), and ends this process as it is.

Also, if the value of the sub time saving grant counter is not "1" (NO in S5044), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the sub time saving grant counter is "0" ( S5046). When the value of the sub time-saving provision counter is "0" (YES in S5046), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the third mode suggestion effect start command (S5047), and ends this process as it is. Moreover, when the value of the sub time saving provision counter is not "0", ie, when the value of the sub time saving provision counter is 3 or more (NO in S5046), this process is terminated as it is.

After the first mode suggestion production start command is set by the production control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal production mode of the first embodiment, special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special Figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", special figure 2 variation pattern " P21”, special figure 2 variation pattern “P22”, special figure 2 variation pattern “P23”, or special figure 2 variation pattern “P24”. Even in the case, at the same time as 4 seconds before the end of the variation time corresponding to the selected special figure variation pattern (see FIG. 71), the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be shifted to the time saving production mode. A mode entry suggesting image ZS suggesting that there is a possibility is displayed (see FIG. 72(B)). Also, after the first mode suggestive effect start command is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal effect mode of the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1" and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P2" , Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P4", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P5", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P6", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P7", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P8", Special Figure 2 variation Pattern "P21", special figure 2 variation pattern "P22", special figure 2 variation pattern "P23", or special figure 2 variation pattern "P24" Variation production based on any selected special figure variation pattern is executed Even if it is, two seconds before the end of the variation time corresponding to the selected special figure variation pattern (see FIG. 71), the remaining two special symbols on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 When the variable display is performed, the first mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK1 is displayed, suggesting that the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times) and that the number of times of shortening of working hours is controlled (Fig. 72 (C)).

After the second mode suggestion production start command is set by the production control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal production mode of the first embodiment, special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special Figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", special figure 2 variation pattern " P21”, special figure 2 variation pattern “P22”, special figure 2 variation pattern “P23”, or special figure 2 variation pattern “P24”. Even in the case, at the start of the execution of the variation performance based on the selected special figure variation pattern (see FIG. 71), the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 suggests that there is a possibility of shifting to the time saving performance mode. A mode entry suggestion image ZS is displayed (see FIG. 73(A)). Also, after the second mode suggestive effect start command is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal effect mode of the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1" and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P2" , Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P4", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P5", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P6", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P7", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P8", Special Figure 2 variation Pattern "P21", special figure 2 variation pattern "P22", special figure 2 variation pattern "P23", or special figure 2 variation pattern "P24" Variation production based on any selected special figure variation pattern is executed Even if it is, at the same time as four seconds before the end of the variation time corresponding to the selected special figure variation pattern (see FIG. 71), the remaining one special symbol on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 When the variable display is performed, the second mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK2 is displayed, suggesting that the non-specific variable number of times reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times) and is controlled to the shortening of working hours (Fig. 73 (B)).

After the third mode suggestion production start command is set by the production control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal production mode of the first embodiment, special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special Figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", special figure 2 variation pattern " P21”, special figure 2 variation pattern “P22”, special figure 2 variation pattern “P23”, or special figure 2 variation pattern “P24”. Even in the case, at the start of the execution of the variation performance based on the selected special figure variation pattern (see FIG. 71), the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 suggests that there is a possibility of shifting to the time saving performance mode. A mode entry suggesting image ZS is displayed (see FIG. 74(A)). Also, after the third mode suggestive effect start command is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 during the setting of the normal effect mode of the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1" and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P2" , Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P4", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P5", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P6", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P7", Special Figure 1 variation pattern "P8", Special Figure 2 variation Pattern "P21", special figure 2 variation pattern "P22", special figure 2 variation pattern "P23", or special figure 2 variation pattern "P24" Variation production based on any selected special figure variation pattern is executed Even if it is, 3 seconds before the end of the variation time corresponding to the selected special symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 71), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. Then, the third mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK3 is displayed, suggesting that the non-specific variation number reaches the number of times of reduced working hours (600 times) and is controlled to the reduced working hours state (see FIG. 74 (B) ).

[Variation Production End Processing] In the fluctuation production end processing (S4410), first, as shown in FIG. 53, the production control microcomputer 91 analyzes the fluctuation stop command (S5101). Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the symbol variation to stop the variation is a big win or a small win (S5102). If it is a big hit or a small hit (YES in S5102), perform a sub time-saving counter setting process for setting the time-saving number of times of the time-saving state set based on the big hit or small hit to the sub time-saving counter (S5103), step Proceed to S5109.

If the pattern variation to be stopped is neither a big hit nor a small hit, that is, if it is a loss (NO in S5102), it is determined whether the value of the sub time-saving counter is greater than "1" (S5104). If the value of the sub time-saving counter is greater than "1", the process proceeds to step S5106, but if the value of the sub time-saving counter is less than "1" (NO in S5104), the type of losing pattern is a special loss (time-saving loss ) (S5105). If it is not a special losing design B or a losing design D (NO at S5105), the process proceeds to step S5106, but if it is a losing design B or a losing design D (YES at S5105), it is set based on a special loss. The sub time saving counter setting process for setting the time saving number of times in the time saving state to the sub time saving counter is performed (S5103), and the process proceeds to step S5109.

In step S5106, it is further determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter is greater than "0". If the value of the time saving counter is "0" (NO in S5106), the process proceeds to step S5109, but if the value of the time saving counter is greater than "0" (YES in S5106), the special symbol related to the fluctuation stop It is determined whether or not it is related to the stop of special figure 2 (S5107). If it is not a special figure 2 stop (NO in S5107), proceed to step S5109, but if it is a special figure 2 stop (YES in S5107), decrement the value of the sub time saving counter by 1 (S5108), step S5109 proceed to As a result, the value of the sub time-saving counter at the start of the pattern variation in the time-saving state is managed to be the same value as the value of the time-saving counter.

In step S5109, a variable effect end command for ending the variable effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM94. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stops and displays the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in a predetermined stop mode.

[Production Mode Designation Processing] In the production mode designation processing (S4412), first, as shown in FIG. 54, the production control microcomputer 91 analyzes the game state command (S5201). Next, based on the analysis result of the game state command, it is determined whether or not the time saving state (S5202). If it is not in the time saving state (NO in S5202), the process proceeds to step S5205, but if it is in the time saving state (YES in S5202), it is determined whether or not the production mode currently set is the normal mode (S5203). If the production mode is not the normal mode (NO at S5203), the process proceeds to step S5205, but if it is the normal mode (YES at S5203), the time saving mode transition flag is turned ON (S5204), and the process proceeds to step S5205.

In step S5205, based on the analysis result of the game state command, it is determined whether or not the non-time saving state. If it is not a non-time-saving state (NO in S5205), this process ends, but if it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S5205), it is determined whether the currently set production mode is the time-saving mode (S5206) . If the production mode is not the time saving mode (NO in S5206), this process is finished, but if it is the time saving mode (YES in S5206), the normal mode transition flag is turned ON (S5207) and this process is finished.

When the time saving mode transition flag is turned ON in this process, the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode when the next symbol variation is started. In addition, when the normal mode shift flag is turned ON, when the pattern variation related to the next special figure 1 is started, the production mode is controlled to the normal mode. As a result, pattern variation is started in an appropriate performance mode according to the game state.

11. Flow of Game in this Embodiment Next, the flow of progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 55, first, in the non-time-saving state (normal game state), the game proceeds with left-handed hitting. For this reason, the lottery of special figure 1 is performed in the non-time-saving state, and a big hit may be won based on this. When a jackpot based on the lottery of special figure 1 is won, a 4R jackpot game is performed, and the game state after that is controlled to a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is one.

On the other hand, the lottery result of the special figure 1 is more likely to be lost than the jackpot winning. In addition, the lottery result of the special figure 1 may be a special loss (time saving loss: loss pattern B). And when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is the losing pattern B, the game state is controlled to the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is one. Moreover, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the possibility of a normal loss (a loss pattern A) is higher than that of a special loss (a loss pattern B). Then, when the number of times (non-specific variation number) that the lottery result of special figure 1 is continuously normal loss (non-specific mode) reaches the number of time reduction grants (600 times), the game state is one time reduction Controlled to short working hours.

In the time-saving state, the game proceeds by hitting to the right. Therefore, in the time saving state, a lottery of special figure 2 is performed, and a big hit may be won based on this. The jackpot winning based on the lottery of the special figure 2 includes a jackpot (2nd kind jackpot) based on passing through the specific area 39 from the small win winning or a direct hit jackpot (1st kind jackpot). When a direct hit jackpot (1st kind jackpot) is won, a jackpot game of 10R is performed, and the game state after that is controlled to a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is 6 times. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the player tends to be able to obtain more profits in the jackpot game than when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when winning a small win that allows V passage (passing through the specific area 39) based on the lottery of the special figure 2, as long as the game is played correctly, the jackpot game is always possible. configured to run. Then, when the second kind of jackpot is won after winning the small win, after the jackpot game of substantially 10R, the number of times of time saving is controlled to six times. Even in the big winning game performed based on this small winning, the player tends to obtain more profits than the big winning game when winning the big winning in the special figure 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, the lottery result of the special figure 2 may be lost. In the case of losing, there are cases where it is normal loss (loss pattern C) and special loss (time saving loss: loss pattern D). In the time saving state, when the remaining number of times of time saving is two times or more, the game state after that is not controlled to the time saving state and the remaining number of times of time saving is reduced regardless of whether the game is a normal loss or a special loss. . However, when the remaining number of times of time saving is 1, that is, when the lottery result in the last one pattern variation in the time saving state is a losing pattern D, the subsequent game state is the time saving number of times of 100 times. Controlled to short working hours.

In addition, when the lottery result in the last one symbol variation in the time saving state is the losing symbol C, the game is controlled to the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by generating a prize to the second start port 21 before being controlled to the non-time-saving state at the last time, save up to four special figures 2 reservations. be able to. Then, in the non-time-saving state controlled by the fact that the lottery result in the last one pattern variation in the time-saving state is the missing pattern C, first, the lottery for four special figures 2 reserve can be received. Then, when the lottery result for the special figure 2 hold is a losing pattern D, the subsequent game state is controlled to the time saving state with the number of time saving times being 6 times.

On the other hand, when all the lottery results for the special figure 2 reservation are the losing pattern C, the game is played again with the left hand, aiming at a big hit based on the lottery of the special figure 1.例文帳に追加

In other words, in the lottery of special figure 2, as long as the direct hit jackpot, the small win that can pass through V, and the special loss continue to be won, the state that is advantageous to the player mainly for the lottery of special figure 2 (the state that is easy to win the jackpot) continues. On the other hand, in the lottery of special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure for the number of times of time saving set for the time saving state and the special figure 2 reservation (remaining reservation of special figure 2) that remained when the time saving state ended If all the lottery results are a loss, it will return to the game centered on the lottery of special figure 1 again.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the lottery of the last special figure 2 in the time saving state, the time saving state based on the losing pattern D can be set. This point will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. In this form, as described above in the gaming state management process (see FIG. 34), in the state where the time saving state is set, even if the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a losing design D, based on the losing design The time saving determination of whether or not to control to the time saving state is not performed, and the time saving state is not set. For this reason, for example, when the remaining number of times of time saving is two times, even if the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a losing pattern D, it is not controlled to the time saving state based on this. However, regarding the last symbol variation in the time saving state, although the symbol variation is in the time saving state at the start of the symbol variation, it is controlled to the non-time saving state at the timing before the time saving determination. As a result, in the last symbol variation in the time saving state, the time saving determination is performed in the non-time saving state, so based on the fact that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is the losing pattern D, the subsequent game state is to the time saving state. It is possible to provide a new game property of being controlled. Furthermore, the chance that the game state is controlled to the time saving state based on the fact that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a losing pattern D can be provided once in addition to the number of lotteries related to the special figure 2 hold. is made of.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when controlling to the time saving state based on the losing pattern D, the number of time saving times to be set for the time saving state to be controlled is the special figure 2 jackpot determination performed at the start of the pattern fluctuation. It is acquired in the processing (see FIG. 31). Then, the acquired and stored number of times of time saving is set in the game state management process executed thereafter. That is, in the last symbol variation in the time saving state, the number of time saving times is acquired in the time saving state and set in the non-time saving state. On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 suspension that remained when the time saving state ended, it was already in a non-time saving state at the start of the pattern fluctuation, so the time saving number of time saving state controlled based on the lost pattern D It will be acquired in a non-time saving state. Then, in the present embodiment, the number of time saving times for the time saving state set based on the losing pattern D is determined by the losing pattern type determination table for the non time saving state (see FIG. 9 (A)) in the time saving state. is obtained from the lost pattern type determination table for the time saving state (see FIG. 9B). And, in the lost pattern type determination table, the number of times of time saving set based on the lost pattern D differs between the one for the non-time saving state and the one for the time saving state. That is, even if the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a losing pattern D, it is possible to acquire a different number of times of time saving during the time saving state and during the non-time saving state. As a result, the time-saving state controlled when the lottery result of the special figure 2 was a losing pattern D in the last pattern fluctuation in the time-saving state, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation that remained when the time-saving state ended It is possible to provide a new game property in which the number of times of time saving is different between the time saving state controlled when is the failing pattern D.

12. Effect example in this form 12-1. Effect Mode Next, examples of effects in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 74. FIG. First, the presentation mode will be explained. The production mode is a mode of production using the image display device 50, the speaker 67, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the like. The background images and the like are different, and the variable production using the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is also executed in a manner corresponding to the production mode.

The production mode of this form includes a normal production mode (first production mode) in which a normal daytime background image is displayed, and a short-time production mode (second production mode) in which a nighttime background image is displayed. there is

The normal production mode is a production mode that is set when there is no storage of special figure 2 related random numbers acquired in a non-time saving state. In other words, it is a normal production mode that is set in a state in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly progressed in a non-time saving state. The display screen 50a shows a state in which the daytime background is displayed and the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed. Further, in this embodiment, small patterns KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 can be displayed in addition to the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. The small patterns KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are displayed smaller than the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and can be stop-displayed after the variable display, similarly to the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. It shows a state in which both the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the normal performance mode. In the normal effect mode, both the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are displayed in the normal mode.

When the daytime mode is set, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a pending icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas. The reserved icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3 and a fourth display area 50d4. A pending icon HA can be displayed in 50d2 and 50d4. For example, when the special figure 1 pending number is "4", the pending icon (for example, the normal pending icon HA ) is displayed. As a result, the storage number of the first special figure reservation displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a is displayed by the display of the reservation icon (for example, the normal reservation icon HA) when the daytime mode is set. It is possible to present it in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, it is possible to provide an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area near the reserved icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e displays an icon (eg, the normal icon TA) that is the same as or different from the pending icon (eg, the normal pending icon HA) in response to the start of the special figure variation effect. is possible.

It should be noted that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pending icon display area 50d can be a display area that displays both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, or can be a display area that displays only one.

The time saving production mode is a production mode set when it is in a time saving state and when there is a memory of a special figure 2 related random number acquired in a non working time saving state. In other words, it is a time-saving performance mode set in a state in which the game is mainly progressed by the lottery of the special figure 2. A night background is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are both variably displayed. Also, it shows a state in which both the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the time saving performance mode. In the time saving performance mode, both the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are displayed in a special mode different from the normal mode in the normal performance mode.

In addition, in the time-saving performance mode, the game is progressed aiming at winning the second start port 21 by striking to the right in the time-saving state, so in the time-saving production mode, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the game by striking to the right. A right-handed informing image GA for informing that the ball should be thrown is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a. In addition, in the time saving production mode, in order to suggest the end time of the time saving state, the production control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times display GB indicating the remaining number of times of the time saving number in the lower right part of the display screen 50a (FIG. 74 (F )reference). The remaining count display GB is also referred to as an end time indication display. The remaining number of times display GB may be displayed in a manner different from that when the number of remaining times of time saving is two or more, for example, after the number of times of remaining time saving becomes one. As a result, the state where there is no possibility of being controlled to the time saving state based on the special loss and the case where there is a possibility of being controlled to the time saving state based on the special loss are properly played by the remaining number display GB. It is possible to show the In addition, after the remaining number of times of time saving is 1, by displaying the remaining number of times display GB in a different manner from when the remaining number of times of saving time is 2 times or more, appropriately indicating the situation that the number of remaining times of time saving is small, It is possible to urge the player to appropriately acquire the special figure 2 reservation with the aim of winning the second start port 21. In addition, after the time saving remaining number of times becomes 0 times, the remaining number of times display GB may be a display showing the number of special figure 2 pending acquired by the end of the time saving state.

When the night mode is set, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a hold icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas. The reserved icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3 and a fourth display area 50d4, and each display area 50d1, 50d2, A pending icon (for example, a normal pending icon HA) can be displayed in 50d2 and 50d4. For example, when the special figure 2 pending number is "4", the first display area 50d1, the second display area 50d2, the third display area 50d3 and the fourth display area 50d4 hold icons (for example, the normal hold icon HA ) is displayed. As a result, the display of the hold icon HA in the case where the night mode is set makes it possible for the player to easily understand the number of stored second special figure reservations displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b. It is possible.

Further, it is possible to provide an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area in the vicinity of the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e displays an icon (eg, the normal icon TA) that is the same as or different from the pending icon (eg, the normal pending icon HA) in response to the start of the special figure variation effect. is possible.

It should be noted that the number of display areas forming the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pending icon display area 50d can be a display area that displays both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, or can be a display area that displays only one.

Next, when the non-specific variation number of times reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times) in the non-shortening of working hours state, the timing at which the normal production mode shifts to the short of working hours production mode will be explained using the time chart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 57, at the same time as the variable display of special symbols in the case where the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of shortening working hours (600 times) is stopped and displayed, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes from the non-shortening of working hours state to the short of working hours. be controlled by the state. However, at the same time that the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state, the normal performance mode is not shifted to the time-saving performance mode. As shown in FIG. 57, after the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the time saving state, the fluctuation display of the next special symbol is started, and at the same time, the normal production mode is shifted to the time saving production mode. Become.

12-2. Variation Production Next, the variation production will be described. When the variable display of the special symbols is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines the variation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbols and the result of the special symbol lottery (the result of the big hit determination or the small hit determination, the result of the symbol type determination, the reach determination , and the result of variation pattern determination), etc., to execute the variation effect. In the variable effect, the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed superimposed on a predetermined background image on the display screen 50a. In the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed and then stopped. That is, after the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed over the variable time of the special symbols, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is informed by the stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

12-2-1. In the vicinity of the center of the display screen 50a of the effect symbol image display device 50, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in a variable effect, and then stopped in a predetermined manner. In addition, in one section of the left end of the upper end of the display screen 50a, while the special symbols are being variably displayed, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed, and then stopped in a predetermined manner. be. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be hidden during the variable performance, while the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are not hidden. In this respect, the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 function as patterns that supplement the roles of the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition, each display area for displaying the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 can be appropriately changed.

12-2-2. Normal Fluctuation The pachinko game machine 1 can perform normal fluctuation first in the fluctuation effect. The normal fluctuation functions as an effect suggesting that the special symbol fluctuation display has started. When the variable display of the special symbols is started, for example, on the display screen 50a, the left effect symbol 8L, the medium effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2 and the right The small pattern KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and from the state of waiting for the variable display of the special pattern, the variable display of the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is started. is started, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 is started. Then, if the variation pattern of the variation display of this special symbol is, for example, "normal loss variation" (fluctuation when the lottery result of special figure 1 is a loss symbol A and there is no reach), a stop mode that suggests a loss ( Effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a so-called loose pattern. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure.

On the other hand, the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol is, for example, "N loss variation" (the lottery result of special figure 1 is a loss symbol A and there is a reach, and furthermore, a variation that indicates a loss by normal reach). In the case of the variation pattern, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode, and reach is established. At this time, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed, and the ready-to-win performance is performed according to the fluctuation pattern. It should be noted that the stop order and stop mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be changed as appropriate.

12-2-3. N reach (normal reach)
The pachinko game machine 1 can perform N reach when reach is established in normal variation. The N reach is an effect suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as an effect capable of suggesting the probability of the big win to the player.

In the N-reach, the state in which the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and then the variation speed of the middle effect symbol 8C gradually decelerates. Then, when the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbols is, for example, "N loss variation", the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed in a stop mode suggesting a loss (so-called loose eyes). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbols is, for example, ``N big win variation'' (big win variation indicating the winning of the big win by normal reach), it is stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win (so-called double eyes). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. It should be noted that the content of the N-reach effect is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the middle effect symbol 8C, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

In addition, with respect to the stop mode of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that suggest losing, the loose stitches when the reach is not established are referred to as "non-reach loose stitches" or "non-reach loose stitches", and the loose stitches when the reach is established. They are called "reach loose eyes" or "reach loose eyes". How to combine the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that make up the non-reach loose eyes (for example, "2, 3, 1" and "5, 8, 6", etc.), and each that makes up the reach loose eyes How to combine the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, "2.1.2" or "5.4.5") is selected by the performance control microcomputer 91. FIG. Also, how to combine the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that constitute the stop mode (double eyes) suggesting a big hit (for example, "2.2.2" or "7.7.7"). is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol.

12-2-4. SP Reach Pachinko game machine 1 can perform SP Reach after N Reach in the variation performance related to Special Figure 1.例文帳に追加The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility that the result of the special pattern lottery was a "jackpot" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect capable of suggesting the accuracy of the big win to the player. do.

In the SP reach, after the N reach, for example, a background image dedicated to the SP reach is displayed on the display screen 50a, and an image indicating that the SP reach has started is displayed in the center of the display screen 50a. In addition, an effect dedicated to SP reach is performed. In this embodiment, as the SP ready-to-play production, a production in which a predetermined story of the main character in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses is executed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach exclusive production is reached, if the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation display is, for example, "SP jackpot fluctuation" (jackpot fluctuation indicating jackpot winning by SP reach), the display screen 50a , a happy ending effect suggesting a big win is performed, and the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbols is, for example, "SP loss variation" (variation of loss with reach indicated by SP reach), a bad end production suggesting loss is performed, and the production pattern is performed. 8L, 8C, and 8R stop display in a stop mode (so-called loose stitches) suggesting a failure. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure.

12-2-5. Battle reach Pachinko game machine 1 can perform battle reach after N reach. The battle reach is an effect that can be performed in a state in which the game is progressing mainly by the lottery of the special figure 2 with a high possibility of the jackpot game being performed. Therefore, the battle reach functions as an effect that makes the player expect a big win game.

In battle reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (Battle Reach start title image) G1 indicating that Reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(B), a battle reach exclusive effect is performed. Then, when the final stage of the battle reach dedicated production is reached, if the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation display is, for example, "battle jackpot fluctuation" (jackpot fluctuation indicating jackpot winning by battle reach), Fig. 58 (C 1), the display screen 50a displays a success effect suggesting a big win (for example, a display in which the main character wins the battle and stands tall, a victory effect), and the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stops and displays in a stop mode (so-called parallel order) that suggests a big win. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. Even when a big winning game is played based on the winning of a small winning, it can be performed in the same manner as in the case of winning a big winning. On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "battle loss variation" (loss variation indicating loss due to battle reach), as shown in FIG. (for example, a display in which the enemy character wins the battle and is in a standing position, a defeat effect) is performed, and the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a stop mode (so-called loose eyes) suggesting a failure. do. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. In addition, in this form, in the "battle loss fluctuation" related to the storage of special figure 2 related random numbers last acquired in the time saving state, after that, it is possible to execute the result production described later. It should be noted that the contents of the battle ready-to-win production can be changed or added as appropriate.

12-2-6. Time-Saving Rush Performance Next, the time-saving rush performance executed when the result of the special lottery is a special loss (losing pattern D) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 can execute the time saving rush effect in a variable effect controlled to the time saving state based on the special loss. Therefore, the time-saving rush effect functions as an effect that makes the player expect to be controlled to the time-saving state.

The production control microcomputer 91 starts a variable production accompanied by a battle reach similarly to the "battle big win fluctuation" and "battle losing fluctuation" even when the time saving rush production is performed. However, when the time-saving rush effect is performed, the effect control microcomputer 91 ends the battle ready-to-win in the middle and shifts to the time-saving rush effect, as shown in FIG. 58(B). That is, each image for battle reach is hidden, and after that, in the transition to the time-saving rush effect, first, the relief image G70 is displayed on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 59A). The relief image G70 of this embodiment is an image of a fellow character of the main character. By the display of this relief image G70, the time-saving rush effect is started. Also, a relief effect GE is displayed so as to overlap the relief image G70. The rescue effect GE shown in FIG. 59(A) is an image showing how fellow characters are exerting their rescue ability.

And, if the pattern variation is the last time in the time saving state, or the remaining reservation of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state, and the lottery result is, for example, a loss pattern D (special loss) (that is, then special When it is controlled to the time saving state based on the loss), the production control microcomputer 91 advances the time saving rush production in a successful mode. That is, when the variable effect pattern is "THP75" or "THP95", the rescue effect GE is emphasized as a success mode, and the companion character is able to demonstrate its rescue ability (FIG. 59(B)). . As a result, it is possible to show the player that the time-saving rush effect of the success mode will shift to the time-saving state. In the success mode, after that, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the relief image G70 is hidden, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed with a special eye with the middle effect symbol 8C as the special symbol TZ. In this form, the special symbol TZ is an image containing the characters (○ background) of the name of the production mode corresponding to the time saving state of the transition destination. If it is displayed as Also, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed with the special stitches, and the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are stop-displayed with the specific stitches of "1, 3, 5" (see FIG. 59(C)). As described above, in this embodiment, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed with a special eye, and the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are stop-displayed with a specific eye, and the shift to the time-saving state is made. is suggested. That is, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed with special eyes, and the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are stopped and displayed with specific eyes, which means that the transition to the time saving state (with the special loss It functions as an effect that suggests to the player that Incidentally, the special stitches of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific stitches of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

On the other hand, if the pattern variation is the last one in the time saving state, or the remaining reservation of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state, and the lottery result is, for example, a lost pattern C (normal loss) (that is, then special When it is not controlled to the time-saving state based on the loss), the time-saving rush production progresses in a failure mode. That is, when the variable effect pattern is "THP74" or "THP94", the mode of failure is to weaken the rescue effect GE and then erase it, thereby showing how the companion character cannot demonstrate its rescue ability (FIG. 59 ( D)). In the failure mode, after that, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of a loose pattern suggesting a failure. In accordance with this, the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed with separate stitches. In addition, in this form, in the failure mode of the time saving rush production related to the memory of the special figure 2 related random number acquired last in the time saving state, it is possible to execute the result production described later. In addition, it is possible to change or add the production content of the time saving rush production as appropriate.

12-2-7. Result Production Next, the result production will be described. As described above, when the lottery result related to the storage of the special figure 2 related random number acquired last in the time saving state is a normal loss, the production control microcomputer 91 is usually lost according to the pattern variation. Result production can be executed. After the result performance is performed, the game progresses mainly with the lottery of the special figure 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the result effect then functions as a effect suggesting that the game proceeds mainly through the lottery of the special figure 1.例文帳に追加Furthermore, it also functions as an effect suggesting that the state advantageous to the player whose game is progressed mainly by the lottery of the special figure 2 ends. Incidentally, the result performance is a performance that is not executed in the battle reach when the jackpot game is played after that, or in the time-saving rush performance of the success mode when the special losing pattern D is won.

FIG. 60(A) is a diagram for explaining a case where a result effect is executed in the "battle loss variation" related to the memory of the special figure 2 related random number finally acquired during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 60(A), a result image RG is displayed in the result effect in the "battle losing variation". The result image RG displayed in the "battle losing variation" is displayed in front of the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., which are stopped and displayed in a mode suggesting losing. The result image RG includes the number of game balls acquired in the game progressed mainly through the lottery of special figure 2, the number of jackpot games executed in that state, and the like. As a result, it is possible to appropriately show the player the result of the game in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly progressed.

FIG. 60(B) is a diagram for explaining the case where the result production is executed in the failure mode of the time saving rush production related to the storage of the special figure 2 related random number acquired last in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 60(B), the result image RG is displayed in the result effect in the failure mode of the rush effect as well as in the result effect in the "battle loss variation". In addition, even in the result performance in the failure mode of the time-saving rush performance, the result image RG is displayed in front of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., which are stop-displayed in a mode suggesting failure. Then, it is possible to appropriately show the player the result of the game in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly progressed by the result effect.

12-2-8. icon

Next, normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that the normal icon suspension effect shown in FIG. 61 is executed when the scenario pattern 1 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502. As shown in FIG. 61(A), when the normal effect mode is set, the daytime background is displayed on the display screen 50a. As shown in FIG. 61(A), the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are stop-displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61A, when the daytime mode is set, a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3 and a No pending icon is displayed in the fourth display area 50d4. Further, as shown in FIG. 61A, the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG.

After that, for example, when two game balls enter the first start port 20 in a non-time saving state, the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed, and when the execution of the variable effect is started, in FIG. 61 (B) As shown, the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started on the display screen 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is also started. Further, as shown in FIG. 61B, the icon TA is normally displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. In addition, a normal hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG.

After that, when the execution of the variable effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are also definite. displayed to stop. Further, as shown in FIG. 61(C), when execution of the variable effect ends, the normal icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 disappears. become.

In addition, when it is called a fixed stop display (definite stop display) or a final stop display (final stop display), it means a state in which the production pattern is completely stopped. On the other hand, the temporary stop display means that the variation speed of the production pattern is "0", but it changes such as shaking at the position where the production pattern is displayed, and the expansion and contraction are repeated. Say the state of not stopping. The term "stop display" may refer to temporary stop display or fixed stop display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(D), one of the oldest stored first special figure reservations is consumed, a special figure 1 lottery is performed, and execution of the variable effect is started, image display. The normal pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the device 50 is shifted rightward by one, and the icon provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is displayed. The icon TA is normally displayed in the display area 50e. Further, when the execution of the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are varied. Display is also started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a description will be given of an effect example when the change opportunity effect for the normal pending icon HA is executed. 62, scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 3, scenario pattern 4, scenario pattern 5, scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, or scenario pattern 8 is executed by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S4502. , one of the scenario patterns is selected, and the execution of the change opportunity production is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S4403.

When the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed and the execution of the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. KZ2 and KZ3 are variably displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 62A, the icon TA is normally displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. In addition, when one 1st special figure suspension is memorize|stored, the normal suspension icon HA is displayed on 1st display area 50d1 provided in the display screen 50a of the image display apparatus 50. FIG.

Then, when the change trigger effect for the normal pending icon HA is executed, the normal pending icon HA in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is displayed as shown in FIG. 62(B). The change trigger image MY is displayed so as to hide it. By displaying the change trigger image MY on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that there is a possibility that the normal hold icon HA will be changed to the hold icon in the special display mode.

For example, if one of the scenario patterns 2, 3, or 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, the effect example shown in FIG. will proceed to On the other hand, for example, when one of scenario patterns 5, 6, 7, or 8 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 at step S4502, the The process proceeds to the production example shown in (A).

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, an example of an effect when the normal change opportunity effect is executed for the icon TA will be described. In addition, the example of the production shown in FIG. , one of the scenario patterns is selected, and the execution of the change opportunity production is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S4403.

When the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed and the execution of the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. KZ2 and KZ3 are variably displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 63A, the icon TA is normally displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. In addition, when one 1st special figure suspension is memorize|stored, the normal suspension icon HA is displayed on 1st display area 50d1 provided in the display screen 50a of the image display apparatus 50. FIG.

Then, when the normal change trigger effect for the icon TA is executed, as shown in FIG. The change trigger image MY is displayed so as to hide it. By displaying the change trigger image MY on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to grasp the possibility of changing from the normal icon TA to the special display mode icon.

For example, if one of the scenario patterns 2, 3, or 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, the effect example shown in FIG. will proceed to On the other hand, for example, in step S4502, if one of scenario patterns 5, 6, 7, or 8 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91, the The process proceeds to the production example shown in (A).

Next, the case where the example of effect shown in FIG. 62(B) progresses to the example of effect shown in FIG. 64 will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 64 is an example of a pending change effect when any one of scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 3, or scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502. .

As shown in FIG. 64(A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are variably displayed. The icon TA is normally displayed in the icon display area 50e that is displayed.

When the execution of the change opportunity effect ends, the pending change effect is executed, and the normal pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 changes to the state shown in FIG. ), it is changed to the first special hold icon HA1a in the first special display mode A. By displaying the first special pending icon HA1a in the first special display mode A on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to grasp that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that of the normal pending icon HA.

After that, when the change opportunity effect is executed again and the pending change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. The first special hold icon HA1a of the first special display mode A that is set to the first special hold icon HA1b of the first special display mode B may be changed. By displaying the first special pending icon HA1b of the first special display mode B on the display screen 50a, it can be understood that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than the first special pending icon HA1a of the first special display mode A. It is possible. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 64(B), the scenario pattern 3 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, and the execution of the change opportunity effect is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4403. This is an example of the production of

Moreover, after that, if the change opportunity performance is not executed again, the pending change performance is not executed, and the variable performance proceeds. In this case, the scenario pattern 2 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, and the execution of the change opportunity effect is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4403. be.

Next, the case where the example of presentation shown in FIG. 63(B) progresses to the example of presentation shown in FIG. 65 will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 65 is an example of the change effect when one of scenario pattern 2, scenario pattern 3, or scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502. .

As shown in FIG. 65(A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are variably displayed. The icon TA is normally displayed in the icon display area 50e that is displayed.

When the execution of the change opportunity effect is completed, the change effect is executed, and the normal icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is changed to that shown in FIG. ), the icon is changed to the first special corresponding icon TA1a of the first special display mode A, as shown in FIG. By displaying the first special icon TA1a in the first special display mode A on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the expectation of the big win is higher than that of the icon TA.

After that, the change opportunity effect is executed again, and when the change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the first special icon TA1a of the first special display mode A to be changed to the first special icon TA1b of the first special display mode B is changed. By displaying the first special icon TA1b of the first special display mode B on the display screen 50a, it is possible to let the player know that the expectation of the big win is higher than the first special icon TA1a of the first special display mode A. It is possible. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 65(B), the scenario pattern 3 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 at step S4502, and the execution of the change opportunity effect is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 at step S4403. This is an example of the production of

Moreover, after that, if the change opportunity production is not executed again, the change production is not executed, and the variable production proceeds. In this case, the scenario pattern 2 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, and the execution of the change opportunity effect is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4403. be.

Next, using FIGS. 66 to 70, the normal icon (normal pending icon HA, normal relevant icon TA) is changed to the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) An example of the effect when the effect, the change effect) is executed will be described.

Next, the case where the example of effect shown in FIG. 62(B) progresses to the example of effect shown in FIG. 66 will be described. 66, one scenario pattern is selected from scenario pattern 5, scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, or scenario pattern 8 by the effect control microcomputer 91 at step S4502, and effect control is performed at step S4405. This is an example of an effect when execution of the effect character-associated suggestive effect is selected by the microcomputer 91 for the game.

When the execution of the change opportunity effect ends, the pending change effect is executed, and the normal pending icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 changes to the state shown in FIG. ), it is changed to the second special hold icon HA2 in the second special display mode. By displaying the second special hold icon HA2 in the second special display mode on the display screen 50a, it is possible for the player to grasp that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that of the normal hold icon HA.

For example, when the second special pending icon HA2 in the second special display mode is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and the suggestive effect associated with the effect character is not executed, the variable effect being executed ends. After that, it proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 67(A).

On the other hand, when the second special pending icon HA2 in the second special display mode is displayed in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the effect accompanying the effect character is executed. If so, the process advances to an example of presentation shown in FIG. 66(B). Here, the effect accompanied by the effect character means that the second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special icon HA2, second special When the icon TA2) is displayed, the second special icon (second special It is an effect in which an effect character can be additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 50d or the icon display area 50e in association with the pending icon HA2, the second special relevant icon TA2). Note that, before the performance character-accompanied production is executed, a production character-associated suggestive production suggesting the possibility of execution of the production character-associated production is executed.

As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the effect character-associated suggesting effect is executed, for example, the first display provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 starts from the lower left of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. A first effect character KY1 moving toward the second special hold icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50d1 is displayed.

)
After that, the execution of the effect character accompanying suggestion effect ends, and the effect character accompanying effect for the second special hold icon HA2 displayed in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is not executed. If so, the process advances to an example of effect shown in FIG. 66(C-1). As shown in FIG. 66(C-1), the first effect character KY1 reaches the second special hold icon HA2 displayed in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. Without further ado, the player returns to the lower left corner of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and the display of the first effect character KY1 ends. After that, after the end of the variable production, the process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 67(A).

On the other hand, when the effect character-associated suggestive effect is completed and the effect character-associated effect is executed, the process proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. The process proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 68(A). 66(C-2), any one of scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, or scenario pattern 8 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, and step This is an example of the effect when the effect control microcomputer 91 selects execution of the effect character accompanying suggestive effect in S4405, and selects execution of the effect character accompanying effect by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4406.

As shown in FIG. 66(C-2), in the first display area 50d1 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the first effect character KY1 having the second special hold icon HA2 is displayed. ing. Here, the display mode of the second special pending icon HA2 after execution of the effect accompanying the effect character (see FIG. 66 (C-2)) is the same as the display mode of the second special pending icon HA2 before executing the effect accompanying the effect character. are the same. That is, in the first embodiment, the display mode of the second special hold icon HA2 is not changed by the execution of the effect accompanying the effect character.

Next, after the end of the variable production shown in FIG. 66 (A) or after the end of the variable production shown in FIG. An example of an effect when the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is performed and execution of the variable effect is started will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that, in step S4502, if one of the scenario patterns 5, 6, 7, or 8 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91, the scenario pattern shown in FIG. It may proceed to the production example shown in .

When one of the oldest stored first special figure reservations is consumed, a lottery for special figure 1 is performed, and the execution of the variable performance is started, the first special figure provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is started. The second special hold icon HA2 displayed in the 1 display area 50d1 shifts one by one to the right, and as shown in FIG. The second special icon TA2 is displayed in the icon display area 50e. Further, when the execution of the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are varied. Display is also started.

Thereafter, when the effect character-associated suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect, for example, the corresponding icon provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is displayed from the lower left of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. A first effect character KY1 moving toward the second special icon TA2 displayed in the area 50e is displayed.

)
After that, the execution of the effect character-associated suggestive effect ends, and when the effect character-associated effect is not executed, the process proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 67(C-1). In this case, scenario pattern 5 has been selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502. As shown in FIG. 67(C-1), the first effect character KY1 reaches the second special icon TA2 displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. Without further ado, the player returns to the lower left corner of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and the display of the first effect character KY1 ends. After that, the execution of the variable production ends.

On the other hand, when the execution of the effect character accompanying suggestive effect is completed and the effect character accompanying effect is executed, the process proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 66(C-2). In this case, it is an example of an effect when one of the scenario patterns 6, 7 and 8 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 in step S4502.

The second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 are displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 for the first effect character KY1. As shown in FIG. 67(C-2), the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays the first effect character KY1 holding the second special hold icon HA2. By displaying the first effect character KY1 gripping the second special icon TA2 on the display screen 50a, the player can understand that the expectation of the big win is higher than when only the second special icon TA2 is displayed. It is possible. After that, the process proceeds to an example of the variable effect shown in FIG. 68(A). Here, the display mode of the second special relevant icon TA2 after execution of the production character accompanying production (see FIG. 67 (C-2)) is the display form of the second special relevant icon TA2 before execution of the production character accompanying production ( (See FIG. 67(B)). That is, in the first embodiment, the display mode of the second special icon TA2 is not changed by the execution of the effect character-associated effect.

Next, using FIG. 68, after the end of the variable performance shown in FIG. 66 (C-2), the execution of the next variable performance is started and progressed to the variable performance shown in FIG. 68 (A), or A description will be given of the case where the example of effect shown in FIG. 68(A) is entered during execution of the variable effect shown in FIG. In the production example shown in FIG. 68, one scenario pattern is selected from scenario pattern 6, scenario pattern 7, or scenario pattern 8 by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, and the production is controlled in step S5010. An example of an effect when any one of the 1st dialogue forewarning effect pattern, the 4th dialogue forewarning effect pattern, the 5th dialogue forewarning effect pattern, or the 6th dialogue forewarning effect pattern is selected by the microcomputer 91. is.

As shown in FIG. 68A, the second special icon TA2 is displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 during execution of the variable effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are also variably displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the first effect character KY1 holding the second special hold icon HA2 is displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. , the first dialogue image SG1 may be displayed near the right side of the first effect character KY1 displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. A first dialogue image SG1 indicating "good feeling" is displayed near the right side of the first effect character KY1 displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. Thus, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the first effect character KY1 imitates a microphone and says "good feeling" using the second special icon TA2. By displaying the first serif image SG1 on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the expectation of the jackpot is the lowest among the first serif image SG1, the second serif image SG2, and the third serif image SG3. can be made known to the player.

After that, when proceeding to the example of effect shown in FIG. 68(B), when proceeding to the example of effect shown in FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped in the same stop mode ("5.↓.5") to establish reach. At this time, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed, and the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is performed. In the production example shown in FIG. 68(B), the scenario pattern 6 is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, and the fourth speech announcement production pattern is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S5010. Special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", or special figure 1 variation pattern "P8" in the case, It is a variation effect based on one of the special figure 1 variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), when the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop in the same stop mode ("5 ↓ 5") and reach is established, the image display device 50 A second dialogue image SG2 indicating "chance" may be displayed near the right side of the first effect character KY1 displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 68). (B)). By displaying the second dialogue image SG2 near the right side of the first effect character KY1 displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the player can see the second dialogue image SG2. It is possible to make it appear as if the 1st effect character KY1 has spoken a word "chance" by using the second special relevant icon TA2 imitating a microphone. By displaying the second dialogue image SG2 on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the second dialogue image SG2 is displayed next to the third dialogue image SG3 among the first dialogue image SG1, the second dialogue image SG2, and the third dialogue image SG3. It is possible to make the player grasp what he or she can expect from the big win. Further, by displaying the second dialogue image SG2 on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 after the reach is established, it is possible to make the player have expectations.

After the display of the second serif image SG2 displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is completed, the process proceeds to normal reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a case where only the effect character change suggesting effect is executed during execution of the variable effect and a case where the effect character change suggesting effect and the effect character change effect are executed will be described. Note that this is the case where the example of presentation shown in FIG. 68(A) progresses to the example of presentation shown in FIG. 69(A). In this case, one of the scenario patterns 6, 7, and 8 is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, and execution of the production character change suggesting production is selected in step S5008. In the case of special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", Of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P7" or the special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", it is assumed that the variation production based on one of the special figure 1 variation patterns is being executed.

Here, the effect character change effect means that the effect character KY displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 has a higher chance of winning a big hit than the effect character KY. It functions as a notice production that will be replaced by. In addition, the effect character change suggesting effect means that the effect character KY displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 has a higher chance of winning a big hit than the effect character KY. It functions as a foreshadowing that suggests the possibility of being replaced by KY.

As shown in FIG. 69A, the second special icon TA2 is displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 during execution of the variable effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are also variably displayed.

Thereafter, when the effect character change suggesting effect is executed during execution of the variable effect, for example, the icon display area provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 from the lower left of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 A second special corresponding icon TA2 displayed in 50e and a third effect character KY3 running toward the first effect character KY1 are displayed. When the effect character change suggesting effect is executed and the third effect character KY3 running toward the second special corresponding icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 is displayed from the lower left of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, It is possible for the player to grasp the possibility that the first effect character KY1 will be replaced by the third effect character KY3.

For example, the scenario pattern 6 is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, execution of the production character change suggesting production is selected in step S5008, and the production control microcomputer 91 in step S5010 announces the first line. When production pattern is selected, special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", or special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", if it is a variation production based on any special figure 1 variation pattern, Figure 69 (B-1) Proceed to the production example shown in .

If the effect character change effect is not executed while the variable effect is being executed, when the effect character change suggestion effect is completed, as shown in FIG. The second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 are passed through from the direction of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. , and the display of the third effect character KY3 ends. After that, the execution of the variable performance is completed, or the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode, and reach is established.

For example, scenario pattern 8 is selected by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S4502, execution of production character change suggesting production is selected in step S5008, and the sixth dialogue announcement is made by the production control microcomputer 91 in step S5010. When production pattern is selected, special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", or special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", if it is a variation production based on any special figure 1 variation pattern, Figure 69 (B-2) Proceed to the production example shown in .

When the effect character change effect is executed during execution of the variable effect, the effect character change effect is executed when the effect character change suggestion effect is finished. In the effect character change effect, as shown in FIG. 69B-2, the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays the second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1. , and the third effect character KY3 are displayed together. As shown in FIG. 69B-2, in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the first effect character KY1 displays the second special icon TA2 imitating a microphone. 3 A scene of handing over to production character KY3 is displayed. In the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a scene is displayed in which the first production character KY1 hands over the second special relevant icon TA2 imitating a microphone to the third production character KY3. Thus, it is possible for the player to grasp that the change of the production character from the first production character KY1 to the third production character KY3 has succeeded.

Thereafter, when the execution of the effect character change effect during execution of the variable effect ends, the first effect character KY1 disappears from the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and the effect character KY1 disappears. As shown in (C), the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays the third effect character KY3 holding the second special icon TA2. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. By displaying the third effect character KY3 holding the second special icon TA2 in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the first effect character KY1 and the second effect character KY3 are displayed. It is possible to let the players know that they can expect a greater chance of winning than when KY2 is displayed. Further, the display mode of the second special icon TA2 displayed on the display screen 50a after the effect character change effect is executed is the same as that displayed on the display screen 50a before the effect character change effect is executed. 2 The display mode of the special icon TA2 (see FIG. 67A) is the same. However, by displaying the third effect character KY3 holding the second special icon TA2 in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 The player can expect a big win more than when only the second special icon TA2 is displayed in the icon display area 50e provided.

Next, proceeding to FIG. 70, in the variable effect, the third dialogue image SG3 is displayed to the right of the first effect character KY1 displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. may be displayed. By displaying the third dialogue image SG3 indicating "Atsui!" , it is possible to make it appear to the player that the third effect character KY3 has said a single word "Atsui!" using the second special icon TA2 imitating a microphone. By displaying the third dialogue image SG3 on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the player can expect the biggest win among the first dialogue image SG1, the second dialogue image SG2, and the third dialogue image SG3. It is possible to make people understand After that, it proceeds to normal reach during execution of the variable production.

In a conventional pachinko game machine, a hold change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed (for example, the color of the hold icon is changed, the shape of the hold icon is changed), and the changed display form is held. It is possible to suggest the possibility of a big win to the player by means of the icon. However, there is a problem that a mere change in the display mode of the pending icon restricts the development of the presentation. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) is displayed, the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2 , second special corresponding icon TA2) are not changed, but the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) and the effect character KY are displayed together with the second special icon (second special icon TA2). A pending icon HA2 and a second special relevant icon TA2) are displayed to suggest the possibility of a big win to the player. Furthermore, the effect character KY displayed together with the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) is the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2). ) is handed over to another production character KY and replaced, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big win. Furthermore, the dialogue image SG of the effect character KY having the second special icon (the second special pending icon HA2, the second special relevant icon TA2) is displayed, suggesting the possibility of a big win. As a result, when the second special icon (the second special pending icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2) is displayed, the production character KY with a different degree of expectation for a big win and the serif image SG with a different degree of expectation for a big win are displayed. It is possible to entertain the variation presentation by giving expectation to the possibility that the result of the big win determination will be a big win. Therefore, it is possible to amuse the player with various effects triggered by the display of the second special icons (the second special pending icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2) that do not limit the development of the effects. It has become. In addition, a first special icon (first special pending icon HA1, first special corresponding icon TA1) that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit by changing the display mode of the icon (holding icon, the corresponding icon), an icon (holding icon, the corresponding icon ) is not changed and the effect character KY is accompanied by the second special icon (the second special reserved icon HA2, the second special relevant icon TA2). It is possible to entertain people.

12-2-9. In the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, the variation performance in the case where there are two remaining times until the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of saving time, and the number of times of saving time is reached. In the variation performance when there is one time remaining until the game is finished, and the variation performance when the non-specific variation number of times reaches the time reduction giving number of times, the mode suggesting performance is executed. In the mode suggestion performance, the mode entry suggestion image ZS (name display) that suggests the possibility of shifting to the time saving performance mode and the possibility of shifting to the time saving performance mode, that is, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the time saving state. A mode-entry suggesting count-up image ZK (associated image) that suggests the possibility of being entered is displayed on the display screen 50a. In addition, in the variable performance when the non-specific variable number of times reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours, it is entered into a mode that informs that the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the shortening of working hours. A confirmed image ZT may be displayed on the display screen 50a.

There are three types of mode entry suggesting countup images ZK: a first mode entry suggesting countup image ZK1, a second mode entry suggesting countup image ZK2, and a third mode entry suggesting countup image ZK3. The first mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK1 is a mode entry suggestion displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 in a variation effect in the case where the non-specific variation number of times is two times remaining until the number of times of shortening of working hours is reached. It is a count-up image ZK. In addition, the second mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK2 is a mode displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 in a variation effect in the case where the number of times of non-specific variation is one remaining until the number of times of time reduction is reached. This is a rush suggestion count-up image ZK. Further, the third mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK3 is a mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 in a variation effect when the non-specific variation number reaches the time reduction provision number. is.

Referring to FIG. 71, the timing at which the mode entry suggesting image ZS is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 and the timing at which the mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 are described. explain.

When the non-specific variation number of times is two times remaining until the number of times of reduction in working hours is reached, for example, when the variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P6" is executed, as shown in FIG. 71, the The mode-entry suggesting image ZS is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 at the timing when four seconds remain after the non-execution of the variable effect. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 71, a count-up image ZK1 suggesting entering the first mode is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 at the timing when two seconds remain after the non-execution of the effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, at the same time when the execution of the variable effect ends, the display of the mode entry suggesting image ZS and the first mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK1 from the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 ends. .

Subsequently, when the non-specific variation number of times is one remaining until the number of times of shortening of working hours is reached, for example, at the same time as the start of execution of the variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", as shown in FIG. , the mode entry suggesting image ZS is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 . After that, at the timing when 4 seconds remain after the non-execution of the variable effect, the second mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK2 is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, at the same time when the execution of the variable effect ends, the display of the mode entry suggesting image ZS and the second mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK2 from the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 ends. .

Subsequently, when the non-specific variation number of times reaches the time saving number of times, for example, at the same time as the start of execution of the variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", as shown in FIG. 71, the image display device 50 A mode entry suggestion image ZS is displayed on the display screen 50a. After that, at the timing when three seconds remain after the non-execution of the variable effect, the third mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK3 is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71, display of the mode entry suggesting image ZS and the third mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK3 from the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 ends before the execution of the variable effect ends. becomes.

Subsequently, at the same time when the mode entry suggesting image ZS and the third mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK3 are finished being displayed, the mode entry confirmation image ZT is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, the execution of the variable effect ends, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the variable effect ended, the display of the mode entry confirmation image ZT on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 ends. becomes.

Next, when the number of non-specific fluctuations is 2 times remaining to the number of time reduction grants (600 times), that is, when the number of fluctuations of the special figure reaches the ceiling 2 times remaining, the number of non-specific fluctuations is the number of time reduction grants (600 times ), that is, when the ceiling is reached two times, the mode suggesting effect performed during execution of the variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. FIG.

First, using FIG. 72, when the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the remaining two times to the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times), an example of the fluctuation production executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P6" explain.

As shown in FIG. 72(A), when the lottery for the special figure 1 is performed and the execution of the variable performance is started, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are variably displayed, and the icon TA is normally displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. A normal hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. Also, above the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a first game state change suggestion image TZ1 indicating "Two times to the ceiling" is displayed. When the first game state change suggesting image TZ1 is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and the remaining two special symbol variations are displayed for the player, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shortened. It is possible to grasp that it is controlled by the state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(B), when it is 4 seconds before the end of execution of the variable production, the lower right of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 indicates the possibility of shifting to the time saving production mode. A rush suggesting image ZS and a mode rush suggesting effect character TK are displayed. Note that the mode entry suggesting effect character TK is a professional wrestler effect character. Note that, as shown in FIG. 71B, the mode entry suggesting effect character TK displayed at the lower right of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is in a state of suppressing the mode entry suggesting image ZS.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 72(C), two seconds before the end of execution of the variable effect, the upper right of the mode entry suggesting image ZS and the mode entry suggesting effect character TK on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. On the other side, a count-up image ZK1 indicating entry into the first mode indicating "one" is displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK1 indicating "one" is displayed on the display screen 50a, and when the non-specific variation number of times is performed remaining two times, the number of times of shortening of time given It is possible to grasp that it reaches

When the execution of the variable effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the normal icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 disappears. In addition, the mode entry suggestion image ZS, the mode entry suggestion effect character TK, and the first mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK1 displayed at the lower right of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 disappear.

Next, the non-specific variation frequency is 1 remaining to the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times), that is, the variation effect when the variation frequency of the special figure reaches the ceiling 1 time remaining will be described with reference to FIG. 73 . In addition, the example of the variation production shown in FIG. 73 is the variation production executed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P7".

One of the oldest reserved first special figure reservations is digested, each of the reserved icons HA displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 shifts to the right one by one, and the number of unspecified fluctuations increases. The variation effect in the case of the remaining number of times "1" until reaching the number of times of shortening working hours is executed (see FIG. 73(A)).

As shown in FIG. 73(A), when the lottery for the special figure 1 is performed and the execution of the variable performance is started, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are variably displayed, and the icon TA is normally displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. A normal hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG.

Also, a second game state change suggesting image TZ2 indicating "one time left to the ceiling" is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (see FIG. 73(A)). By displaying the second game state change suggesting image TZ2, the player is made to understand that the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the time saving state when the remaining one special pattern is displayed in a variable manner. It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 73(B), when the execution of the variable production is started when the non-specific variable number of times is the remaining number of times "1" until the number of times of shortening of working hours is reached, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 The mode-entry suggesting image ZS and the mode-entering suggestion effect character TK are displayed in the lower right corner of the .

As shown in FIG. 73 (B), when the remaining number of times "1" is the remaining number of times until the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours, the remaining three seconds from the end of the execution of the variation effect, the image display device 50 A second mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK2 indicating "two" is displayed above and to the right of the mode entry suggestion image ZS and the mode entry suggestion effect character TK displayed on the display screen 50a. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the second mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK2 indicating "two" is displayed on the display screen 50a, so that when the non-specific variation number remains one time, the number of times of shortening time given It is possible to grasp that it reaches Further, the second mode entry suggesting countup image ZK2 shown in FIG. 73(B) is displayed larger than the first mode entry suggesting countup image ZK1 shown in FIG. 72(C). This makes it easier for the player to grasp that the number of non-specific fluctuations has gradually reached the number of time-saving additions (600 times).

When the execution of the variable effect ends, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 73C, the normal icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 disappears. In addition, the mode entry suggestion image ZS, the mode entry suggestion effect character TK, and the second mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK2, which were displayed in the lower right of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, have disappeared.

Next, when the non-specific variation frequency reaches the time reduction grant frequency (600 times), that is, when the variation frequency of the special figure reaches the ceiling, the variation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 74 . In addition, the example of the variation performance shown in FIG. 74 is the variation performance executed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P7".

Further, a third game state change suggestion image TZ3 indicating "0 times left to the ceiling" is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (see FIG. 74(A)). By displaying the third game state change suggestive image TZ3, it is possible for the player to grasp that the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the time saving state when the variable display of the special symbol ends. It's becoming

One of the oldest reserved first special figure reservations is digested, the reserved icon HA displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is shifted leftward one by one, and the number of non-specific fluctuations is shortened. When the given number of times is reached, the variable effect is executed (see FIG. 74(A)).

As shown in FIG. 74(A), when the lottery for the special figure 1 is performed and the execution of the variable performance is started, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 50a, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are variably displayed, and the icon TA is normally displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74(A), when the execution of the variation effect when the non-specific variation number reaches the time reduction provision number is started, the mode entry suggestion image ZS is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. , and the character TK suggesting entry into the mode are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 74(B), the mode displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is 3 seconds before the end of the execution of the variation effect when the non-specific variation number reaches the time reduction giving number A third mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK3 indicating "three" is displayed to the upper right of the entry suggestion image ZS and the mode entry suggestion effect character TK. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the third mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK3 indicating "three" is displayed on the display screen 50a, so that when the special symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed, the non- It is possible to grasp that the number of times of specific variation reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times). Further, the third mode entry suggesting countup image ZK3 shown in FIG. 74B is displayed larger than the second mode entry suggesting countup image ZK2 shown in FIG. 73B. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of time-saving additions (600 times) when the special symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed. In the first embodiment, as the non-specific variation frequency approaches the time reduction provision frequency, the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK becomes larger, and the player visually sees the non-specific variation frequency approaching the time reduction provision frequency. It is possible to grasp that.

Subsequently, the example of effect shown in FIG. 74(C) is displayed on the display screen 50 a of the image display device 50 . On the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the mode entry confirmation image ZT indicating "time saving effect mode" is displayed. By displaying the mode entry confirmation image ZT on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, it is possible for the player to grasp that the shift to the time saving production mode is performed, that is, the control is performed in the time saving state. there is As shown in FIG. 74(C), since the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the variability effect is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(D), the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. By stop-displaying the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance has ended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a character image indicating "Right shot" and an arrow image indicating the right direction are displayed below the mode entry confirmation image ZT displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. Is displayed. By displaying a character image indicating "Right shot" and an arrow image indicating the right direction, it is possible to urge the player to hit right.

When the variable display of the special symbols is started under control to the time saving state, the normal production mode is shifted to the time saving production mode, and the night background image is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50.例文帳に追加In addition, by shifting to the time-saving effect mode, in the upper right of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a right-handed notification image GA prompting "right-handed" and a remaining count display GB indicating "remaining 0" are displayed. is displayed. By displaying the right hitting notification image GA on the display screen 50a in the time saving production mode, it is possible to prompt the player to hit right in the time saving state. In addition, by displaying the remaining number of times display GB on the display screen 50a, the player is made to understand that the number of times of the remaining time saving is 0, and when the execution of the variable effect is completed, the time saving state ends. It is possible to grasp what is going on.

For example, when the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of time-saving additions (600 times), the player may be surprised and panicked if an effect prompting a right-hand shot is suddenly executed. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern in a non-time saving state "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", special figure 2 variation pattern "P22", special Fig. 2 variation pattern "P23" or special figure 2 variation pattern "P24", even if any special figure variation pattern is selected, just before the end of the execution of the variation effect, that is, just before the end of the variation time, The number indicated by the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK is counted up on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and when the number of times of non-specific variation finally reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times), the image display device 50 A mode entry confirmation image ZT is displayed on the display screen 50a to confirm the transition to the time saving performance mode. As a result, the player is given a surprise by smoothly grasping by the performance that the non-specific fluctuation number of times reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times), and the transition to the shortening of working hours production mode is performed in advance from the remaining two times. It is possible to prevent the user from panicking due to being overwhelmed. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 91 is specially provided with a special production mode from the remaining 2 times when the non-specific fluctuation frequency reaches the time reduction giving frequency (600 times) until the non-specific fluctuation frequency reaches the time saving giving frequency. It is possible to provide the player with a flow in which the number of times of non-specific variation smoothly reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours and enters into a state of shortening of working hours. In this way, it is possible to entertain that the non-specific variation number reaches the number of time reduction grants and is controlled to the time reduction state by the smooth flow of reaching the number of time reduction grants and entering the time reduction state. Become.

13. Effect of the embodiment According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as described in detail above, the remaining two special symbol fluctuation display until the number of times of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times) In the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the time saving state according to the non-specific variation number reaching the time saving giving number (600 times) is displayed on the display screen 50a. be done. Thereby, it is possible to previously grasp that there is a possibility of being controlled to the time saving state according to the non-specific variation number reaching the time saving giving number (600 times). Therefore, the mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 makes the player excited at the possibility of being controlled to the time-saving state, thereby amusing the player and improving the amusement of the game. It is possible.

For example, in the variable display of the remaining two special symbols until the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of times of time reduction (600 times) in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", Special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", special figure 2 variation pattern "P22", special figure 2 variation pattern "P23", or special figure 2 variation pattern "P24", any special figure variation pattern The selection is random. Therefore, depending on the special figure variation pattern selected by the game control microcomputer 81, the flow of the variation effect may deteriorate until the non-specific variation number reaches the time reduction grant number (600 times). According to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, in the variable display of the remaining two special symbols until the number of times of non-specific variation in the non-time saving state reaches the number of times of time saving (600 times), the microcomputer for game control By 81, special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", special figure 2 variation pattern "P22", special figure 2 variation pattern "P23", or special figure 2 variation pattern " P24", even if any special figure fluctuation pattern is selected, the execution of the fluctuation effect ends in the fluctuation display of the remaining two special symbols until the number of times of non-specific fluctuation reaches the number of time reduction grants (600 times) Mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK (first mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK1, second mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK2, third mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK3) just before the last minute (3 or 4 seconds remaining) ) is displayed (see FIG. 71). Thereby, by the game control microcomputer 81, special figure 1 variation pattern "P1", special figure 1 variation pattern "P2", special figure 1 variation pattern "P4", special figure 1 variation pattern "P5", special figure 1 variation Pattern "P6", special figure 1 variation pattern "P7", special figure 1 variation pattern "P8", special figure 2 variation pattern "P21", special figure 2 variation pattern "P22", special figure 2 variation pattern "P23", Or even if it is random which special figure variation pattern is selected from the special figure 2 variation pattern "P24", just before the end of the variation production until the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of time reduction grants (600 times) ( Since the mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK is displayed in accordance with the remaining 3 seconds or 4 seconds), the flow of the variable effect becomes smooth, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, in the normal production mode, until the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times), the remaining two special symbols fluctuation display, image display The display screen 50a of the device 50 displays a count-up image ZK suggesting entry into the first mode (count-up image ZK1 suggesting entry into the first mode, count-up image ZK2 suggesting entry into the second mode, count-up image ZK2 suggesting entry into the third mode, and count-up image ZK3 suggesting entry into the third mode), and a “time-saving effect. mode" is displayed (see FIGS. 72(C), 73(B), and 74(B)). As a result, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays the count-up image ZK suggesting entry into the first mode (the count-up image ZK1 suggesting entry into the first mode, the count-up image ZK2 suggesting entry into the second mode, the count-up image ZK3 suggesting entry into the third mode). And, by displaying the mode entry suggestion image ZS, the possibility that the non-specific fluctuation number reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times) and is controlled to the shortening of working hours is expected, making the player more It is possible to make the player's heart beat faster, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, in the normal production mode, until the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times), the remaining two special symbols fluctuation display, image display Mode entry suggestion countup image ZK (first mode entry suggestion countup image ZK1, second mode entry suggestion countup image ZK2, third mode entry suggestion countup image ZK3) is displayed on display screen 50a of device 50. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have expectations for the transition to the time-saving performance mode. After that, in the normal production mode, a mode entry confirmation image ZT indicating that the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times) and shifts to the reduction of working hours production mode is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. (See FIGS. 74(D) and 74(E)). This makes it possible for the player to grasp that the game will be shifted to the time-saving production mode. Therefore, in the normal production mode, from the remaining two times until the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times), the image display device 50 until the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of times of shortening of time mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK (first mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK1, second mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK2, third mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK3) and mode entry confirmation displayed on the display screen 50a of It is possible to provide the player with an integrated performance by the image ZT. In this way, it is possible to make the player excited and entertained until the number of non-specific variations reaches the number of times of reduced working hours (600 times) after the remaining two times until the number of times of reduced working hours (600 times) is reached.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, in response to the non-specific variation number reaches the number of times of reduction in time (600 times) in the non-time reduction state, compared to the non-time reduction state, to the electric chew 22 The game ball is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is easy to win a prize. As a result, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays the mode entry suggesting countup image ZK (the first mode entry suggesting countup image ZK1, the second mode entry suggesting countup image ZK2, and the third mode entry suggesting countup image ZK3). is displayed, even if the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times) and is suddenly controlled to the state of shortening of working hours, if the game ball is entered into the electric chew 22 by hitting to the right It is possible to let the player know what is good in advance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the second special icon (the second The second special icon (the second special pending icon HA2, the second special The icon TA2) and effect characters KY (first effect character KY1, second effect character KY2, third effect character KY3) may be displayed. In this case, the second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) and production character KY (first production character KY1, second production character KY2, third effect character KY3) is displayed, only the second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) is displayed in the reserved icon display area 50d or the icon display area 50e. The expected jackpot is higher than when it is displayed. As a result, the second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) and effect character KY (first effect character KY1, second effect character Depending on whether or not KY2 and the third effect character KY3) are displayed, it is possible to provide the player with a characteristic effect that allows the player to grasp the possibility of a big win. Therefore, the second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) and production character KY (first production character KY1, second production character KY2) are displayed in the holding icon display area 50d or the icon display area 50e. , and the third performance character KY3) are displayed, it is possible to make the player's heart throb with the possibility of a big win, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the first special icon (the first special hold icon HA1, the first special corresponding icon TA1) of the first special display mode is displayed, the first By changing the display mode of the special icons (first special reserved icon HA1, first special corresponding icon TA1), it is possible for the player to grasp the degree of expectation for a big win. On the other hand, when the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) in the second special display mode is displayed, the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second By displaying the production characters KY (the first production character KY1, the second production character KY2, and the third production character KY3) without changing the display mode of the special icon TA2), the player can grasp the degree of expectation for the big win. It is possible to As a result, the player can grasp the degree of expectation for a big hit by changing the display mode of the icon (suspended icon, the icon) itself, and the degree of expectation for the big win can be determined without changing the display mode of the icon (suspended icon, the icon). , the icon (reserved icon, the icon) is accompanied by the effect character KY (first effect character KY1, second effect character KY2, third effect character KY3), thereby allowing the player to grasp the effect. be. As a result, each performance using the icons (reserved icon, the icon) makes it possible to visually entertain the player, grasp the degree of expectation for the big win, and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 are displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. , the first production character KY1 is replaced by the second production character KY2 or the third production character KY3, the first production character KY1 is replaced by the second production character KY2 or the third production character KY3. The expectation of the jackpot is higher than when it is not. As a result, when the second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 are displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the first effect character KY1 is displayed as the second effect character KY1. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production character KY2 or the third production character KY3 will be replaced. Therefore, in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the second special corresponding icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 displayed due to the display of the second special corresponding icon TA2 are displayed. When the first effect character KY1 is replaced by the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3, the player can be thrilled with the possibility that the first effect character KY1 will be replaced by the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 are displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. In this case, by displaying the dialogue image SG (the first dialogue image SG1, the second dialogue image SG2, and the third dialogue image SG3) of the first effect character KY1, it is possible to make the players grasp the degree of expectation for the big win. As a result, when the second special icon TA2 is displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the effect character KY (the first Whether or not production character KY1, second production character KY2, third production character KY3) is displayed, and the dialogue image SG (first dialogue image SG1, second dialogue image SG2, third dialogue image SG3) of production character KY are determined. ) will be displayed. Therefore, even after the second special icon TA2 is displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, whether or not the effect character KY is displayed and the dialogue image SG are displayed. It is possible to excite whether or not the game will be played, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 are displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. , the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the first effect character KY1 is replaced by the third effect character KY3 than when the first effect character KY1 is not replaced by the third effect character KY3. The 3-speech image SG3 is easily displayed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 are displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the first effect character KY1 becomes the third effect character. It is possible for the player to understand that the ease with which the third dialogue image SG3 is displayed is affected depending on whether or not it is replaced by KY3. Therefore, when the second special icon TA2 and the first effect character KY1 are displayed in the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the first effect character KY1 is the third effect character. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by visually pleasing whether or not the player will be replaced by KY3.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the second special icon (the second When the special pending icon HA2, the second special relevant icon TA2) is displayed, the effect character KY (the first effect character KY1, It is possible for the player to grasp whether or not the second effect character KY2 and the third effect character KY3) will be displayed. Then, when the production characters KY (first production character KY1, second production character KY2, third production character KY3) are displayed, the displayed production characters KY (first production character KY1, second production character KY2, third production character KY3) are displayed. It is possible for the player to understand that the dialogue images SG (first dialogue image SG1, second dialogue image SG2, third dialogue image SG3) are displayed by the three effect characters KY3). As a result, a second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2), effect character KY (first effect character KY1, second effect character KY2, third effect character KY3), and a dialogue image By linking the SGs (the first dialogue image SG1, the second dialogue image SG2, and the third dialogue image SG3), it is possible to amuse the player and improve the amusement of the game.

14. Modifications Modifications will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. In addition, technical features in the above-described first embodiment and modifications below can be deleted as appropriate if they are not described as essential in this specification.

In the above-described first embodiment, the big win and the small win correspond to the "specific result", but it is not limited to this. For example, one of the big win and the small win may correspond to the "specific result", and the other win may correspond to the "non-specific result".

In the above-described first embodiment, in the small winning game that allows V passage based on the lottery of special figure 2, the opening control and distribution member 71 of the second big winning opening 35 (opening and closing member 37) so that V passage always occurs The configuration is such that the operation control of is performed. On the other hand, in a small winning game that allows V passage, the opening control of the second big winning opening 35 and the operation control of the distribution member 71 are performed so that the V may pass but the V may not pass. (In other words, if the timing at which the distribution member 71 is in the pass-allowing state and the timing at which the second big prize winning opening 35 is won match, passage to the specific area 39 occurs. It may be a configuration that does not occur). In addition, a small hit that did not pass through the specific area 39 may correspond to the "non-specific result". In this case, a small win that does not pass through the specific area 39 may be counted as a non-specific result in the number of non-specific variations.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, it is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine, but it may be a type of game machine other than a 1 type 2 type mixing machine such as a so-called "ST machine" or a "probability variable loop machine". If it is a ST machine or a variable loop machine, it may be a so-called "symbol variable machine" that determines the transition to a high probability state with a high jackpot winning probability based on the type of special symbol that has been won, or a V attacker (specific area It may be a so-called “V probability changer” in which a transition to a high probability state is determined based on passage to a specific area in a large winning device having a . Even if the present invention is applied to a game machine of a type other than such a one-kind-two-kind mixed machine, it is possible to provide a new game feature that has never existed before.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the time saving state controlled by the game control microcomputer 81 in response to the non-specific fluctuation number reaching the time saving giving number (600 times) corresponded to the "advantageous game state" . However, it is not limited to this. For example, by the game control microcomputer 81, when it is possible to control to a high probability state with a higher jackpot winning probability than the normal game state, the high probability state and the time saving state, or the high probability state and the non-time saving state, It may correspond to "advantageous gaming state". For example, the number of times the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the losing pattern in the high probability state and the time saving state, or the number of times the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning pattern reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), and the high probability state And it may be possible to shift to a non-time saving state. In this case, the high-probability state and the non-time-saving state correspond to the "advantageous gaming state", and the loss and the small hit correspond to the "non-specific result".

In the first embodiment, when the normal production mode is set, that is, when it is a non-time saving state, the remaining two special symbols until the non-specific variation number reaches the time saving number of times (600 times) Fluctuation display, one remaining special pattern variation display until the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of reduced working hours (600 times), and fluctuation of special patterns when the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of reduced working hours (600 times) With the display, a mode entry suggestion countup image ZK that suggests the possibility of being controlled in a time saving state (first mode entry suggestion countup image ZK1, second mode entry suggestion countup image ZK2, third mode entry suggestion countup Image ZK3) was sometimes displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the normal production mode is set, that is, when it is in a non-working time saving state, the non-specific variation number of times until the number of times of giving time saving (600 times) reaches the remaining three or more special symbols from the variable display A mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the time saving state may be displayed until the special symbol variation display when the specific variation number reaches the time saving giving number (600 times). Also, for example, when the normal production mode is set, that is, when it is in a non-time saving state, the remaining one special symbol variation display until the non-specific variation number reaches the time saving number (600 times) , A mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK (first mode entry suggestion count-up An image ZK1 and a count-up image ZK2 indicating entry into the second mode may be displayed. In addition, for example, when the normal production mode is set, that is, when it is in a non-working time saving state, only in the variable display of the special pattern that the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the time saving giving number (600 times), in the time saving state A mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK that suggests the possibility of being controlled may be displayed.

In the first embodiment, the mode entry suggestion countup image ZK (first mode entry suggestion countup image ZK1, second mode entry suggestion countup image ZK2, third mode entry suggestion countup image ZK3) It corresponded to "suggestion indication". For example, if it is an effect image that suggests the possibility of being controlled in a time saving state, a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a pending icon notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, an effect image may correspond to the "game state suggestion display". In addition, if it is a production image that suggests the possibility of being controlled to a high probability state and a time saving state, or a high probability state and a non-time saving state, a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, Hold An icon notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, and the like may correspond to the "game state suggestion display".

In the first embodiment, the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK is displayed three seconds or four seconds before the end of execution of the variable effect. In this case, 3 seconds or 4 seconds before the end of execution of the variable performance corresponds to "just before the end of the variable performance". However, it is not limited to this. Here, "just before the end of the variable effect" may be a predetermined time before the execution of the variable effect based on the variable time corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the game control microcomputer 81 ends. Here, the predetermined time is a time during which the player can grasp that the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK is immediately before the end of execution of the variable effect. Therefore, as long as the time allows the player to grasp that the mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK is immediately before the end of execution of the variable effect, it may be 5 seconds or more or 2 seconds or less. can be

In the first embodiment, the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK is displayed three seconds or four seconds before the end of execution of the variable effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, until the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of time reduction grants (600 times), the remaining two special symbols are displayed, and the remaining one special symbol is displayed until the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of time reduction grants (600 times). With the fluctuation display of the pattern, the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK is displayed during the execution of the fluctuation production (that is, the timing that is not just before the fluctuation production), and the non-specific fluctuation number reaches the time reduction grant number (600 times) Special In the symbol variation display, the mode-entry suggestion count-up image ZK may be displayed just before the execution of the variation effect is completed. In this way, in the variable display of the special pattern in which the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of time-saving additions (600 times), the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK is displayed just before the execution of the variable performance is completed. Then, the game player is more excited by the mode entry suggesting count-up image ZK displayed just before the end of the execution of the variation performance in the variation display of the special symbol when the specific variation number reaches the time reduction grant number (600 times), It is possible to entertain.

In the first embodiment, the normal production mode corresponds to the "first production mode", and the time saving production mode corresponds to the "second production mode". However, it is not limited to this. For example, by the game control microcomputer 81, when it is possible to control to a high probability state with a higher jackpot winning probability than the normal game state, the high probability state and the time saving state, or the high probability state and the non-time saving state, If it corresponds to "advantageous game state", the production mode indicating that it is controlled to the high probability state and the time saving state may correspond to the "second production mode". Moreover, the production|presentation mode which shows controlling to a high probability state and a non-time-saving state may correspond to "2nd production|presentation mode." In addition, for example, the production mode indicating that it is controlled to a low probability state and a time saving state corresponds to the "first production mode", and is controlled to a high probability state and a time saving state, or a high probability state and a non-working time state The production mode indicating that may correspond to the "second production mode". In addition, the production mode indicating that it is controlled to the high probability state and the time saving state corresponds to the "first production mode", and the production mode indicating that it is controlled to the high probability state and the non-time saving state is the "second It may correspond to the production mode.

In the said 1st Embodiment, the name of the "time saving production|presentation mode" which the mode entry suggestion image ZS shows completely corresponds with the time saving production|presentation mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the name indicated by the mode entry suggestion image ZS does not need to be completely the same as long as it is possible for the player to grasp that it is the time saving production mode, and it may be an abbreviation of the time saving production mode. Also good. For example, by the game control microcomputer 81, when it is possible to control to a high probability state with a higher jackpot winning probability than the normal game state, it is possible to control to a high probability state and a time saving state, or a high probability state and a non time saving state , the name indicated by the mode entry suggestion image ZS may be the name of the production mode corresponding to the high probability state and the time saving state, or the name of the production mode corresponding to the high probability state and the non time saving state. .

The mode entry suggesting image ZS of the first embodiment corresponds to "name display". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is an effect image indicating the name of the time saving effect mode, a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a pending icon notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using the effect image etc. may correspond to "name display". For example, by the game control microcomputer 81, when it is possible to control to a high probability state with a higher jackpot winning probability than the normal game state, it is possible to control to a high probability state and a time saving state, or a high probability state and a non time saving state In the case, the name indicated by the mode entry suggestion image ZS is the name of the production mode corresponding to the high probability state and the time saving state, or the name of the production mode corresponding to the high probability state and the non-time saving state. If there is, a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a pending icon notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc., may correspond to "name display". good.

In the first embodiment, when the normal production mode is set, that is, when it is a non-time saving state, the remaining two special symbols until the non-specific variation number reaches the time saving number of times (600 times) Fluctuation display, one remaining special pattern variation display until the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of times of reduced working hours (600 times), and fluctuation of special patterns when the number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of reduced working hours (600 times) In some cases, a mode-entry suggestion image ZS that suggests that the time-saving production mode may be set is displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the normal production mode is set, that is, when it is in a non-working time saving state, the non-specific variation number of times until the number of times of giving time saving (600 times) reaches the remaining three or more special symbols from the variable display A mode entry suggestion image ZS that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the time saving state may be displayed until the special symbol variation display when the specific variation number reaches the time saving giving number (600 times). Also, for example, when the normal production mode is set, that is, when it is in a non-time saving state, the remaining one special symbol variation display until the non-specific variation number reaches the time saving number (600 times) , The mode entry suggestion image ZS suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the time saving state may be displayed with the variation display of the special symbol that the non-specific variation number reaches the time saving giving number (600 times). In addition, for example, when the normal production mode is set, that is, when it is in a non-time saving state, only in the variable display of the special symbol that the non-specific variation number reaches the time saving number of times (600 times), the time saving state A mode entry suggestion image ZS may be displayed that suggests the possibility of being controlled to .

The mode entry confirmation image ZT of the first embodiment corresponds to the "mode transition confirmation image". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is a production image indicating that the non-specific variation number of times reaches the number of times of reduced working hours (600 times) and is shifted to the reduced working hours production mode, a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 , a pending icon notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, and the like may correspond to the "mode change confirmation image". For example, by the game control microcomputer 81, when it is possible to control to a high probability state with a higher jackpot winning probability than the normal game state, it is possible to control to a high probability state and a time saving state, or a high probability state and a non time saving state In this case, if it is an effect image indicating that the production mode corresponding to the high probability state and the time saving state or the production mode corresponding to the high probability state and the non-working time state is shifted, the display of the image display device 50 A specific effect image displayed on the screen 50a, a pending icon notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, or the like may correspond to the "mode change confirmation image".

Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, the name of the "time saving production|presentation mode" which the mode entry decision image ZT shows completely corresponded to the time saving production|presentation mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the name indicated by the mode entry confirmation image ZT does not need to match completely as long as it is possible for the player to grasp that it is the time saving production mode, and it is an abbreviation of the time saving production mode. Also good.

In the first embodiment, the first starting port 20 corresponds to the "first ball entrance", and the second starting port 21 corresponds to the "second ball entrance". However, it is not limited to this. For example, a starting port different from the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be provided. In this case, the other starting port may correspond to the "first ball inlet", and the second starting port 21 may correspond to the "second ball inlet". It should be noted that the winning of the game ball to the other start opening may be the trigger for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery, ie, acquisition and determination of a big hit random number, etc.).

In the first embodiment, the pattern variation of the special pattern (that is, the lottery result of the special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) is not a small hit, a big hit) that triggers the execution of the jackpot game in a non-time saving state ( When the variable display (that is, the number of times of non-specific variation) of stopping and displaying the special symbols in a predetermined non-specific manner continues, the continuous number of times reaches the predetermined number of times of shortening of time given.However, For example, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 81 can determine the non-specific variation frequency in the time saving state and the non-specific variation frequency in the non-time saving state. The total number of times (hereinafter referred to as non-specific variation total number of times) is a predetermined number of times of shortening of working hours (for example, 600 times) may be configured to control to the time saving state when it reaches.In this case, the effect control microcomputer 91, For example, until the total number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of time reduction grants (600 times), the remaining 2 special symbol fluctuations are displayed, and the remaining 1 time until the total number of non-specific fluctuations reaches the number of time reduction grants (600 times). The image display device 50 displays the mode entry suggestion image ZS and the mode entry suggestion count-up image ZK in the variation display of the special symbols and the variation display of the special symbols in which the total number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times). It may be displayed on the display screen 50a.According to the gaming machine of this modification, the total number of non-specific fluctuation times in the non-time saving state and the non-specific fluctuation number in the time saving state is the number of time reduction grants (for example, 600 time), it is controlled to a time-saving state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port 21 than the non-time-saving state.This causes the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 to display the mode entry suggestion count-up image. By displaying ZK, the total number of non-specific fluctuations in the non-time saving state and the non-specific fluctuations in the time saving state reaches the number of time saving grants (for example, 600 times), and is suddenly controlled in the time saving state. However, it is possible to advance the game by smoothly entering the game ball into the second start port 21, and to improve the game interest. The mode entry confirmation image ZT may be displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 by the variation display of the special symbol that the total number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of times of shortening of working hours (600 times).

In the above first embodiment, winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 and winning of a game ball to the second starting port 21 correspond to the "predetermined condition", but it is not limited to this. For example, another starting port different from the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be provided, and the winning of the game ball to the other starting port may correspond to the "predetermined condition". It should be noted that the winning of a game ball to another starting port may trigger the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (big hit lottery, ie acquisition and determination of big hit random numbers, etc.).

In the first embodiment, the jackpot game corresponds to "special game state" and "special game". However, it is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot game or a small hit game may correspond to a "special game state" or a "special game". Also, the big winning game and the small winning game may correspond to the "special game state" and the "special game".

In the first embodiment, the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) is displayed, the effect characters (first effect character KY1, second effect character KY2, third effect character KY3) are displayed in the pending icon display area 50d or the icon display area 50e. . However, it is not limited to this. For example, a second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) is displayed in the pending icon display area 50d or the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. As long as it is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, it may be displayed anywhere. Specifically, the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) is may be displayed in the pending icon display area 50d provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, or in the vicinity of the icon display area 50e.

The production character KY (the first production character KY1, the second production character KY2, and the third production character KY3) of the first embodiment corresponded to the "accompanying image". However, it is not limited to this. For example, accompanying the display of the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) in the pending icon display area 50d or the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 If it is an effect image that is displayed as an image, a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. are included in the "accompanying image". It may be equivalent.

In the first embodiment, the display modes of the icons (suspended icon, the icon) include a first special display mode (first special display mode A, first special display mode B, first special display mode C), There was a second special display mode (see FIGS. 16(B) and 16(C)). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the display modes of the icon (holding icon, the icon) include a first special display mode (first special display mode A, first special display mode B, first special display mode C) and a second special display mode There may be other display modes. For example, the icon (suspended icon, the icon) may be displayed in a round shape with different colors. In this case, the colors include, for example, blue, green, and red, and the degree of expectation for a big win may increase in the order of blue→green→red. In this case, the display mode of the circular icons with different colors (suspended icon, the icon) may correspond to the "first display mode".

In the first embodiment, the second special icon (second special hold icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) is an icon imitating a microphone. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a second special icon (second special hold The icon HA2 and the second special icon TA2) may be icons in the shape of a baton.

In the first embodiment, the display mode of the icon (holding icon, the icon) is changed to the first special display mode (first special display mode A, first special display mode B, first special display mode C). , suggesting the possibility of a big hit. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the icon (holding icon, the icon) is changed to the first special display mode (first special display mode A, first special display mode B, first special display mode C), and the first special display mode An effect image is displayed accompanying the icon (holding icon, the icon) of the mode (first special display mode A, first special display mode B, first special display mode C), suggesting the possibility of a big win. You can

The first effect character KY1 of the first embodiment corresponds to the "first accompanying image", and the second effect character KY2 corresponds to the "second accompanying image". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first production character KY1 may correspond to the "first accompanying image", and the third production character KY3 may correspond to the "second accompanying image". Also, the second effect character KY2 may correspond to the "second accompanying image", and the third effect character KY3 may correspond to the "second accompanying image".

In the first embodiment, there are three types of production characters KY: a first production character KY1, a second production character KY2, and a third production character KY3. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the effect character KY may include four or more types of effect characters.

In the first embodiment, the second special icon TA2 is displayed in the icon display area 50e, and the first effect character KY1 becomes the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3. replaced. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first embodiment, the second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) is displayed in the reserved icon display area 50d, and the first effect character KY1 may be replaced with the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3.

In addition, accompanying the display of the second special relevant icon TA2 in the icon display area 50e, the first production character KY1 is replaced with the second production character KY2, and the second production character KY2 is replaced with the third production character KY2. There may be a case where the character KY3 is replaced. Incidentally, accompanying the display of the second special relevant icon TA2 in the icon display area 50e, the first production character KY1 is replaced with the second production character KY2, and the second production character KY2 becomes the third production character. In the case of being replaced by the character KY3, the first effect character KY1 was replaced with the second effect character KY2 accompanying the display of the second special icon TA2 in the icon display area 50e. The possibility of winning a big hit may be higher than when the effect character KY2 is not replaced with the third effect character KY3.

In the above-described first embodiment, the effect characters (first effect character KY1, second effect character KY2, third effect character KY3 ) is displayed, the dialogue image SG (the first dialogue image SG1, the first dialogue image SG1, A second dialogue image SG2 and a third dialogue image SG3) were displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is a production image related to production characters (first production character KY1, second production character KY2, third production character KY3), a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, cut An advance notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, or the like may correspond to the "related image". The production images related to the production characters (first production character KY1, second production character KY2, third production character KY3) are the production characters (first production character KY1, second production character KY2, third production character KY2). It is an effect image that allows the player to recognize that there is a connection with KY3). For example, it may be a production image or the like that imitates what the production characters (the first production character KY1, the second production character KY2, and the third production character KY3) like.

In addition, the dialogue image SG (first dialogue image SG1, second dialogue image SG2, third dialogue image SG3) of the first embodiment is not only an effect image suggesting the possibility of a big win, but also a big winning game, for example. It may be an effect image suggesting that there is a possibility of being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of.

The first dialogue image SG1 of the first embodiment corresponds to the "first related image", and the second dialogue image SG2 corresponds to the "second related image". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first dialogue image SG1 may correspond to the "first related image", and the third dialogue image SG3 may correspond to the "third related image". Further, for example, the second dialogue image SG2 may correspond to the "first related image", and the third dialogue image SG3 may correspond to the "third related image".

In the first embodiment, there are three types of serif images SG: the first serif image SG1, the second serif image SG2, and the third serif image SG3. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the serif images SG may include only two types of the first serif image SG1 and the second serif image SG2. Further, for example, there may be four or more types of dialogue images SG. Specifically, there may be four types of words: a first words image SG1, a second words image SG2, a third words image SG3, and a fourth words image SG4 suggesting that the big win is confirmed.

In the first embodiment, the dialogue image SG is a performance image suggesting the possibility that the result of the big win determination will be a big win. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the serif image SG may be an effect image suggesting the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination will be a jackpot and other content. Specifically, the other content may be developing into reach in the variable performance being executed, or executing a cut-in performance or the like in the variable performance being executed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the first effect character KY1 displayed accompanying the display of the second special icon TA2 in the icon display area 50e is replaced with the second effect character KY2 is preferred. , the second dialogue image SG2 is more likely to be displayed than when the first effect character KY1 is not replaced with the second effect character KY2 (see FIG. 26). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the first effect character KY1 displayed accompanying the second special icon TA2 being displayed in the icon display area 50e is replaced with the second effect character KY2, the first effect character Although the second dialogue image SG2 is more likely to be displayed than when KY1 is not replaced by the second effect character KY2, there may be cases where the first dialogue image SG1 is more likely to be displayed. Further, for example, when the first effect character KY1 displayed in the icon display area 50e accompanying the display of the second special icon TA2 is replaced with the second effect character KY2, the first Compared to the case where the effect character KY1 is not replaced by the second effect character KY2, the second dialogue image SG2 is more likely to be displayed, but the third dialogue image SG3 may be less likely to be displayed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the second special icon (the second special reserved icon HA2, the second special The icon TA2) is an icon indicating whether or not the production character KY (the first production character KY1, the second production character KY2, and the third production character KY3) will be displayed in association with the second special icon. rice field. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) displayed in the pending icon display area 50d or the icon display area 50e provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is , the first effect character KY1, the second effect character KY2, or the third effect character KY3. Further, for example, a second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2 ) may be an icon suggesting which of the first dialogue image SG1, the second dialogue image SG2, or the third dialogue image SG3 is to be displayed.

In the first embodiment, the effect character KY (the first effect character KY1, the second effect character KY2 , third effect character KY3) is a effect image suggesting that the dialogue image SG (first dialogue image SG1, second dialogue image SG2, third dialogue image SG3) is displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the pending icon display area 50d provided on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, or the effect characters KY displayed in the icon display area 50e (first effect character KY1, second effect character KY2, third effect character KY3) may be an effect image suggesting that any one of the first dialogue image SG1, the second dialogue image SG2, or the third dialogue image SG3 will be displayed.

In the first embodiment, from the normal icons (normal pending icon HA, normal icon TA) displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the first special icons (first special pending icon HA1, first special The corresponding icon TA1) or the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when a new game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays the first special icon (the first special hold icon HA1, the first special corresponding icon TA1), or a second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) may be displayed.

In the first embodiment, the first effect character KY1 displayed together with the second special icon TA2 on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is replaced with the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3. rice field. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even if the first effect character KY1 displayed together with the second special hold icon HA2 on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is replaced with the second effect character KY2 or the third effect character KY3, good. As a result, the performance character KY displayed together with the second special hold icon HA2 on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is replaced, so that there is a high possibility that the result of the look-ahead determination will be a big win. It is possible to have.

In the first embodiment, when the second special icon (second special reserved icon HA2, second special relevant icon TA2) is displayed, the effect character KY (first effect character KY1, second effect character KY2, second effect character KY2, 3 production character KY3) was sometimes displayed together. Therefore, the second special icon (the second special reserved icon HA2, the second special corresponding icon TA2) is attached to the second special icon, the production character KY (the first production character KY1, the second production character KY2, the third production character KY2). It functioned as an icon capable of suggesting that the character KY3) may be displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) is displayed, the second special icon (second special pending icon HA2, second special corresponding icon TA2) is accompanied by Then, the effect character KY (the first effect character KY1, the second effect character KY2, and the third effect character KY3) may be displayed. In this case, it functions as an icon that notifies that the display of the production character KY (the first production character KY1, the second production character KY2, and the third production character KY3) accompanying the second special icon is confirmed. can be

For example, in the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 1 lottery was explained as not winning a small hit, but the special figure 1 lottery may also be configured to be able to win a small hit. In this case, as the small hits that can be won in the lottery of the special figure 1, both the V non-passing small hits that do not pass through the specific area 39 (V passing) and the V passing small hits that can pass V, Alternatively, only one of them may be used. Further, for example, as a small hit that can be won in the lottery of the special figure 2, it is possible to provide a V non-passing small hit. Also, for example, the number of time reductions described in the first embodiment is merely an example, and can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, for example, in the above-described first embodiment, it was described as a configuration that can be elected to a special loss (time saving loss: loss pattern B) in the lottery of special figure 1, but in special figure 1, a special loss like this loss pattern B ( It is also possible to provide only a normal loss such as the loss pattern A without providing the time saving loss).

Also, for example, in the above-described first embodiment, as the type of the losing pattern related to the special figure 1 and the type of the losing pattern related to the special figure 2, each of the normal losing one and the special losing (time saving losing) one each , have been described. However, for example, with respect to at least one of the type of the losing design related to the special figure 1 and the type of the losing design related to the special figure 2, a plurality of special losing designs may be provided. And when providing a plurality of special losses, for example, for each of the plurality of special losses, the number of times of time reduction set based on each special loss is different. do it.

Further, for example, in the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 81, in the time saving state (state in which the time saving flag is ON), determines whether or not to control to the time saving state according to the special losing pattern. It was described as a configuration that is not performed. However, for example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs time saving determination according to the special losing pattern even in the time saving state, but may be configured not to control to the time saving state unless it is not in the time saving state.

In the above-described first embodiment, the production control microcomputer 91 is individually produced according to the last pattern variation in the time saving state and the pattern variation of the subsequent special figure 2 reservation (remaining reservation of special figure 2). was explained as doing However, the production control microcomputer 91, for example, for the final symbol variation in the time saving state, and the pattern variation of the subsequent special figure 2 reservation (remaining reservation of the special figure 2), even if it is intended to produce collectively good. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 91 performs one production by combining the result of the last special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state and the result of the look-ahead determination about the pattern variation of the special figure 2 reservation. can be considered. Specifically, for example, among the results of the last special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state and the result of the look-ahead judgment about the pattern variation of the special figure 2 reservation, there is a big hit or a small hit. For example, it is conceivable to perform battle reach. Also, for example, if the result of the last special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state and the result of the look-ahead judgment about the pattern variation of the special figure 2 reservation are elected to the special losing design, It is conceivable to perform a time-saving rush performance of a successful mode. Furthermore, for example, the result of the last special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state and the result of the look-ahead judgment about the pattern variation of the special figure 2 suspension are all the big hits, small hits, and special losing patterns. If the winner is not selected, it is conceivable to perform an effect including a result effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the result effect when the lottery result related to the memory of the special figure 2 related random number acquired last in the time saving state is usually lost. I explained that it should be done according to the change. However, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91 may perform the result effect according to the last symbol variation in the time saving state. Also, for example, the production control microcomputer 91 completes the pattern variation related to the storage of the special figure 2 relation random number acquired last in the time saving state, and then acquires the result production first in the non-time saving state It may be started according to the pattern variation related to the storage of the special figure 1 related random number.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 81 performs control to a non-time-saving state when the value of the time-saving counter is "0" in the game state management process in the process during variation special symbol variation, special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-specific manner. However, for example, the control to the time-saving state in response to the special symbol being stopped and displayed in a non-specified manner may be performed, for example, by the special symbol determination process executed after the process during variation special symbol variation.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, it was configured to be able to win the so-called "direct hit big hit" based on the lottery of special figure 2, but the configuration that can not be elected to the "direct hit big hit" based on the lottery of special figure 2, that is, The jackpot based on the lottery of the special figure 2 may be composed of only two types of jackpots.

In the first embodiment, the result of the determination using the jackpot random number is a loss, and when the result of the determination using the symbol type random number is the loss symbols B and D, the time saving state is performed without executing the jackpot game. It was configured to control to On the other hand, a random number (time saving random number) for determining whether to control to the time saving state (time saving determination) is separately acquired, and before the start of the variable display of the special symbol, time saving using the time saving random number It is good also as composition which judges. Even in this case, the time saving determination may be performed after controlling from the time saving state to the non-time saving state by pattern variation, as in the above-described embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 81 counts only the variable display of the special figure 2 with respect to the upper limit number of times of variable display of special symbols in the time-saving state (the number of times of time-saving). However, for example, a special figure 1 upper limit execution count for which only the variation display of special figure 1 is counted, and a special figure 2 upper limit execution number for which only the variation display of special figure 2 is counted are provided, and any number of times You may comprise so that a time saving state may be complete|finished if satisfy|filled. Also, for example, the variation display of special figure 1 and the variation display of special figure 2 are added and counted, and when the total value reaches the total upper limit execution count, the time saving state may be configured to end. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 91 may be counted similarly to the game control microcomputer 81 .

Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the jackpot game (including two types of jackpot games) is executed based on the lottery of the special figure 2 than the case where the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery of the special figure 1 In this case, the privilege that the player can obtain is greater, but the reverse or the same may be used. In addition, the benefits that the player can acquire include the amount of prize balls that can be acquired in the jackpot game, various settings related to the game state after the jackpot game (whether or not to be controlled to the time saving state, such as the number of times of reduced working hours when it is done).

In the above-described first embodiment, four random numbers such as a jackpot random number are obtained as the random numbers (determination information) obtained based on the winning of the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. It is also possible to obtain two random numbers and determine, based on the random numbers, whether it is a big win or a small win, the type of a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of variation pattern. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily set the number of random numbers to be obtained based on the starting prize and what is determined in each random number.

15. Inventions Shown in the Above-described Embodiments The above-described embodiments show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is
Based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance (first start port 20, second start port 21), hit determination processing (special figure 2 big hit determination process (S1002), special figure 1 big hit determination process (S1008) ) is a specific result (jackpot, small hit), a game control means (game control microcomputer 81) for executing a special game (small hit game, jackpot game),
A production control means (production control microcomputer 91) capable of setting one production mode from among a plurality of production modes (normal production mode, short production time production mode),
The game control means is
It is possible to display a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) indicating the determination result of the hit determination process,
After variably displaying the special symbol according to one variation pattern selected from a plurality of variation patterns, the special symbol is stopped and displayed,
According to the non-specific number of non-specific results (normal loss) different from the specific result by the hit determination process (specific variation number) reaches a specified number of times (time reduction given number of times (600 times)), the player Controllable to an advantageous game state (time saving state) that is advantageous for
The production control means is
In the variation display of the special symbol until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times (variation display of the special symbol remaining two times until the number of times of non-specific variation reaches the number of time reduction grants (600 times)), A game state suggestive display (mode entry suggestion countup image ZK (first mode entry suggestion countup image ZK1, second mode entry suggestion countup image ZK2, third mode entry suggestion display perform a count-up image ZK3));
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, in the variable display of the special symbols until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times, the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous game state according to the non-specified number of times reaching the specified number of times is reduced. A suggesting game state suggestion display is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to grasp in advance the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous game state in the variable display of the special symbols until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to amuse the player and increase the interest in the game by displaying the game state suggestive display until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times and the game state is controlled to the advantageous game state.

The invention according to means A2 is the gaming machine according to means A1,
The production control means is
Based on the variation pattern, it is possible to execute a variation effect indicating the determination result of the hit determination process,
Even if any one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected by the game control means, in the variation display of the special symbol until the non-specific number of times reaches the specified number of times, the variation executing the game state suggestion display just before the end of execution of the effect;
It is a gaming machine characterized by

For example, in the variation display of the special symbol until the non-specific number reaches the specified number of times, it is random which variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of variation patterns, so depending on the selected variation pattern The flow of production until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times may deteriorate. According to the gaming machine of this configuration, even if any of the plurality of variation patterns is selected, in the variation display of the special symbols until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times, the variation effect Just before the end of the execution of , a game state suggestive display is made. As a result, even if it is random which variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of variation patterns, the flow of production until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times becomes smooth, and the game interest can be enhanced. It becomes possible.

The invention according to means A3 is the gaming machine according to means A1 or A2,
The production control means is
One production mode can be set from among multiple production modes (normal production mode, short production mode),
It has a first production mode (normal production mode) and a second production mode (time-saving production mode) indicating that the advantageous game state is controlled,
In the variable display of the special symbols until the non-specific number of times in the first production mode reaches the specified number of times, the game state suggestion display is executed,
In the variable display of the special symbol until the non-specific number of times in the first production mode reaches the specified number of times, a name display (mode entry suggestion image ZS) indicating the name of the second production mode is executed.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, in the variable display of the special symbols until the non-specified number of times in the first production mode reaches the specified number of times, the game state suggestion display and the name display indicating the name of the second production mode are executed. be done. As a result, by executing the game state indication display and the name display, it is possible to raise expectations for the non-specified number of times to reach the specified number of times, and to increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means A4 is the gaming machine according to means A1 or A2,
The production control means is
One production mode can be set from among multiple production modes (normal production mode, short production mode),
It has a first production mode (normal production mode) and a second production mode (time-saving production mode) indicating that the advantageous game state is controlled,
In the variable display of the special symbols until the non-specific number of times in the first production mode reaches the specified number of times, the game state suggestion display is executed,
In the first production mode, executing a mode setting confirmation display (mode entry confirmation image ZT) indicating that the non-specific number of times reaches the specified number of times and the second production mode is set,
The mode setting confirmation display is a display indicating the name of the second effect mode,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the game state suggestive display is executed in the variable display of the special symbols until the non-specific number of times in the first production mode reaches the specified number of times, thereby giving the player the second production. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the setting of the mode. After that, mode setting confirmation display indicating the name of the second effect mode is executed, and it is possible to let the player know that the setting of the second effect mode is confirmed. As a result, the game state suggesting display and the mode setting confirmation display are performed until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times after the special symbols are varied and displayed until the non-specified number of times in the first effect mode reaches the specified number of times. It is possible to provide the player with a flow of a series of performances by and to entertain the player until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The invention according to means A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4,
The ball entrance includes a first ball entrance (first starting opening 20) and a second ball entrance (second starting opening 21) different from the first ball entrance,
The advantageous gaming state is an easy-to-enter gaming state (time-saving state) in which the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance than the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state), and the game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that it can be controlled to the easy-to-enter game state in response to the non-specified number of times reaching the specified number of times in the normal game state.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times in the normal game state, the ball is controlled to the easy-to-enter game state in which the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance than in the normal game state. be done. As a result, by executing the game state suggesting display, even if the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times and the ball is suddenly controlled to the easy-to-ball-enter game state, the ball is smoothly entered into the second ball entrance. It is possible to advance the game, and to enhance the interest in the game.

The invention according to means A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The ball entrance includes a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance,
The advantageous gaming state is an easy-to-enter gaming state (time-saving state) in which the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance than the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state), and the game control means is
According to the total number of times of the non-specified number of times in the normal game state and the non-specified number of times in the easy-to-enter game state (unspecified fluctuation total number of times) reaches the specified number of times, the easy-to-enter game is controllable to a gaming state,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the total number of non-specified number of times in the normal game state and the non-specified number of times in the easy-to-enter game state reaches the specified number of times, the second It is controlled to a ball-entering easy game state in which the ball is easily entered into the ball-entering hole. As a result, the game state suggestion display is executed, and the total number of non-specified times in the normal game state and the non-specified number of times in the easy-to-enter game state reaches the specified number of times, and the easy-to-enter game state is reached. Even if the player is suddenly controlled, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second ball entrance and proceed with the game, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is
Control to a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of predetermined conditions (winning of game balls to the first starting port 20, winning of game balls to the second starting port 21). A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) capable of determining whether or not,
Production control means (production control microcomputer 91) capable of controlling a predetermined production,
A display unit (display screen 50a of the image display device 50) capable of displaying the effect,
The production control means is
Predetermined icons (holding icons (normal holding icon HA, first special holding icon HA, first special holding icon HA1, second special holding icon HA2), the icon (normal icon TA, first special icon TA1, second special icon TA2)) can be displayed,
Accompanying the display of the predetermined icon, an accompanying image (production character KY (first production character KY1, second production character KY2, third production character KY3)) can be displayed,
The special game is more favorable when the accompanying image is displayed without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon than when the accompanying image is not displayed without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon. likely to be controlled by the state (see FIG. 20),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed more when the accompanying image is displayed along with the display of the predetermined icon without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon. Therefore, the possibility of being controlled to the special game state is higher than when the accompanying image is not displayed accompanying the display of the predetermined icon. Thus, the player is informed of the possibility of being controlled to the special game state not by the display mode of the predetermined icon displayed on the display unit but by whether or not the accompanying image is displayed along with the predetermined icon. It becomes possible to provide the player with a novel performance that makes the player grasp it. Therefore, when the accompanying image is displayed without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by making the player anticipate the possibility of being controlled to the special game state.

The invention according to means B2 is the gaming machine according to means B1,
The display mode of the predetermined icon includes a first display mode (first special display mode (first special display mode A, first special display mode B, first special display mode C)), and the first display mode There is a second display mode (second special display mode) different from
The production control means is
When the predetermined icon in the first display mode is displayed, the possibility of being controlled to the special game state is suggested by changing the display mode of the predetermined icon,
When the predetermined icon in the second display mode is displayed, the accompanying image is displayed without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon, suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the special game state. do,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the predetermined icon in the first display mode is displayed, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed, thereby letting the player know the possibility of being controlled to the special game state. It is possible to grasp On the other hand, when the predetermined icon in the second display mode is displayed, the associated image is displayed without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon, thereby reducing the possibility of being controlled to the special game state. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player can grasp the possibility of being controlled to the special game state by changing the display mode of the predetermined icon itself, or by displaying the accompanying image without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon. It is possible to distinguish between the case where the player is allowed to grasp the situation. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility of being controlled to the special game state by various effects using the predetermined icons, to entertain the player, and to increase the interest in the game. .

The invention according to means B3 is the gaming machine according to means B1 or B2,
The accompanying images include a first accompanying image (first effect character KY1) and a second accompanying image (second effect character KY2) different from the first accompanying image,
The production control means is
making it possible to replace the first accompanying image with the second accompanying image when the first accompanying image is displayed without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon;
When the first accompanying image is replaced with the second accompanying image, the possibility of being controlled to the special game state is higher than when the first accompanying image is not replaced with the second accompanying image ( See FIG. 20),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the first accompanying image is displayed without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon, the first accompanying image is replaced with the second accompanying image. The possibility of being controlled to the special game state is higher than when the accompanying image is not replaced with the second accompanying image. Accordingly, when the first accompanying image is displayed along with the display of the predetermined icon, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the first accompanying image is replaced with the second accompanying image. Therefore, when the first accompanying image is displayed along with the display of the predetermined icon on the display part, it is possible to raise the amusement of the game by giving expectation to the possibility of being replaced by the second accompanying image.

The invention according to means B4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3,
The production control means is
When the associated image is displayed in association with the display of the predetermined icon, a related image (speech image SG (first speech image SG1, second speech image SG2, third speech image SG3)) can be displayed,
The related image is an effect image that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the special game state,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when an accompanying image is displayed accompanying the display of the predetermined icon, the associated image related to the accompanying image is displayed, and the displayed associated image enters the special game state. It is possible to grasp the possibility of being controlled. Thus, when a predetermined icon is displayed, it is possible to expect whether or not an accompanying image will be displayed accompanying the display of the predetermined icon, and whether or not a related image related to the accompanying image will be displayed. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player anticipate the possibility that the predetermined icon will be displayed and the player will be controlled to the special game state continuously, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means B5 is the gaming machine according to means B3,
The production control means is
When the associated image is displayed in association with the display of the predetermined icon, a related image (speech image SG (first speech image SG1, second speech image SG2, third speech image SG3)) can be displayed,
As the related image, a first related image (first dialogue image SG1) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the special game state, and a possibility of being controlled to the special game state is higher than that of the first related image. and a second related image (second serif image SG2) suggesting that
It is easier to display the second related image when the first associated image is replaced with the second associated image than when the first associated image is not replaced with the second associated image (see FIG. 26). ),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when an accompanying image is displayed accompanying the display of a predetermined icon, a related image related to the accompanying image may be displayed. Then, the case where the first accompanying image displayed accompanying the predetermined icon is replaced with the second accompanying image is more controlled to the special game state than the case where the first accompanying image is not replaced with the second accompanying image. The second related image is likely to be displayed, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the As a result, it is possible for the player to understand that whether or not the accompanying image is replaced after the predetermined icon is displayed affects the ease with which the second related image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player excited to see whether or not the attached image displayed in association with the predetermined icon will be replaced.

The invention according to means B6 is the gaming machine according to means B4 or means B5,
the predetermined icon is an icon suggesting that the accompanying image is displayed;
The accompanying image is a rendering image suggesting that the related image is displayed,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand that the accompanying image will be displayed when the predetermined icon is displayed. Then, when the associated image is displayed without changing the display mode of the predetermined icon, it is possible for the player to understand that the related image is displayed by the associated image. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player by connecting a predetermined icon, an accompanying image displayed accompanying the predetermined icon, and a related image related to the accompanying image. It is possible to enhance amusement in the game.

1 Pachinko game machine 50 Image display device 50a Display screen 20 First start port 21 Second start port 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Effect control microcomputer HA Normal hold icon TA Normal icon HA1 First special reserved icon TA1 First special relevant icon HA2 Second special reserved icon TA2 Second special relevant icon KY1 First production character KY2 Second production character KY3 Third production character SG1 First dialogue image SG2 Second dialogue image SG3 Third dialogue image ZK1 First mode entry suggesting countup image ZK2 Second mode entry suggesting countup image ZK3 Third mode entry suggesting countup image ZS Mode entry suggesting image ZT Mode entry confirmation image

Claims (1)

a game control means for executing a special game when a determination result by a hit determination process is a specific result based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance;
Equipped with a production control means capable of controlling a predetermined production,
The game control means is
Controlling to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player is possible according to the non-specific number of non-specific results different from the specific result in the hit determination process reaching a specified number of times,
The production control means is
Until the non-specified number of times reaches the specified number of times, a game state suggestive display is executed that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images